commit bash-20051103 snapshotbash-3.1-rc1

25 files changed, 8910 insertions, 395 deletions

diff --git a/CHANGES b/CHANGES
index 582bb136..ff4ea84c 100644
--- a/CHANGES
+++ b/CHANGES
@@ -46,6 +46,9 @@ a.  Fixed a bug that caused reversing the incremental search direction to
 b.  Fixed the vi-mode `U' command to only undo up to the first time insert mode
     was entered, as Posix specifies.
 
+c.  Fixed a bug in the vi-mode `r' command that left the cursor in the wrong
+    place.
+
 4.  New Features in Readline
 
 a.  New application-callable auxiliary function, rl_variable_value, returns
@@ -160,7 +163,8 @@ d.  Fixed the non-incremental search code in vi mode to dispose of any current
     undo list when copying a line from the history into the current editing
     buffer.
 
-e.  The variable assignment code now ignores whitespace at the end of lines.
+e.  The variable assignment code now ignores whitespace at the end of lines
+    when assigning to boolean variables.
 
 f.  The `C-w' binding in incremental search now understands multibyte
     characters.
diff --git a/CWRU/CWRU.chlog b/CWRU/CWRU.chlog
index 2d2673f6..6425860d 100644
--- a/CWRU/CWRU.chlog
+++ b/CWRU/CWRU.chlog
@@ -12335,3 +12335,31 @@ execute_cmd.c
 	- in shell_execve, improve the error message a little bit if the
 	  interpreter name in a #! exec header ends with a ^M (as in a DOS-
 	  format file)
+
+				   11/1
+				   ----
+lib/readline/vi_mode.c
+	- fix vi-mode `r' command to leave the cursor in the right place
+
+[bash-3.1-rc1 frozen]
+
+				   11/5
+				   ----
+execute_cmd.c
+	- make sure a DEBUG trap doesn't overwrite a command string passed to
+	  make_child in execute_simple_command
+
+bashline.c
+	- rearrange some code in bash_quote_filename so filenames with leading
+	  tildes containing spaces aren't tilde-expanded before being
+	  returned to the caller
+
+				   11/6
+				   ----
+lib/readline/display.c
+	- when deciding where to move the cursor in rl_redisplay and needing
+	  to move the cursor back after moving it vertically and compensate
+	  for invisible characters in the prompt string, make sure that
+	  _rl_last_c_pos is treated as an absolute cursor position in a
+	  multibyte locale and the wrap offset (number of invisible characters)
+	  is added explicitly when deciding how many characters to backspace
diff --git a/CWRU/CWRU.chlog~ b/CWRU/CWRU.chlog~
index ab78ebd7..76d71efd 100644
--- a/CWRU/CWRU.chlog~
+++ b/CWRU/CWRU.chlog~
@@ -12331,3 +12331,25 @@ builtins/evalstring.c
 	- make sure we don't turn on CMD_NO_FORK in parse_and_execute if
 	  we're running a trap command on signal receipt or exit
 
+execute_cmd.c
+	- in shell_execve, improve the error message a little bit if the
+	  interpreter name in a #! exec header ends with a ^M (as in a DOS-
+	  format file)
+
+				   11/1
+				   ----
+lib/readline/vi_mode.c
+	- fix vi-mode `r' command to leave the cursor in the right place
+
+[bash-3.1-rc1 frozen]
+
+				   11/5
+				   ----
+execute_cmd.c
+	- make sure a DEBUG trap doesn't overwrite a command string passed to
+	  make_child in execute_simple_command
+
+bashline.c
+	- rearrange some code in bash_quote_filename so filenames with leading
+	  tildes containing spaces aren't tilde-expanded before being
+	  returned to the caller
diff --git a/bashline.c b/bashline.c
index 078492fe..496f6c12 100644
--- a/bashline.c
+++ b/bashline.c
@@ -2879,10 +2879,6 @@ bash_quote_filename (s, rtype, qcp)
      to perform tilde expansion, because single and double
      quotes inhibit tilde expansion by the shell. */
 
-  mtext = s;
-  if (mtext[0] == '~' && rtype == SINGLE_MATCH)
-    mtext = bash_tilde_expand (s, 0);
-
   cs = completion_quoting_style;
   /* Might need to modify the default completion style based on *qcp,
      since it's set to any user-provided opening quote.  We also change
@@ -2890,7 +2886,7 @@ bash_quote_filename (s, rtype, qcp)
      the word being completed contains newlines, since those are not
      quoted correctly using backslashes (a backslash-newline pair is
      special to the shell parser). */
-  if (*qcp == '\0' && cs == COMPLETE_BSQUOTE && xstrchr (mtext, '\n'))
+  if (*qcp == '\0' && cs == COMPLETE_BSQUOTE && xstrchr (s, '\n'))
     cs = COMPLETE_SQUOTE;
   else if (*qcp == '"')
     cs = COMPLETE_DQUOTE;
@@ -2898,17 +2894,23 @@ bash_quote_filename (s, rtype, qcp)
     cs = COMPLETE_SQUOTE;
 #if defined (BANG_HISTORY)
   else if (*qcp == '\0' && history_expansion && cs == COMPLETE_DQUOTE &&
-	   history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (mtext, '!'))
+	   history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (s, '!'))
     cs = COMPLETE_BSQUOTE;
 
   if (*qcp == '"' && history_expansion && cs == COMPLETE_DQUOTE &&
-	history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (mtext, '!'))
+	history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (s, '!'))
     {
       cs = COMPLETE_BSQUOTE;
       *qcp = '\0';
     }
 #endif
 
+  /* Don't tilde-expand backslash-quoted filenames, since only single and
+     double quotes inhibit tilde expansion. */
+  mtext = s;
+  if (mtext[0] == '~' && rtype == SINGLE_MATCH && cs != COMPLETE_BSQUOTE)
+    mtext = bash_tilde_expand (s, 0);
+
   switch (cs)
     {
     case COMPLETE_DQUOTE:
diff --git a/bashline.c~ b/bashline.c~
index b2041e8f..c1e52a03 100644
--- a/bashline.c~
+++ b/bashline.c~
@@ -1443,7 +1443,11 @@ command_word_completion_function (hint_text, state)
 
       if (absolute_program (hint))
 	{
-	  match = strncmp (val, hint, hint_len) == 0;
+	  if (igncase == 0)
+	    match = strncmp (val, hint, hint_len) == 0;
+	  else
+	    match = strncasecmp (val, hint, hint_len) == 0;
+
 	  /* If we performed tilde expansion, restore the original
 	     filename. */
 	  if (*hint_text == '~')
@@ -1476,7 +1480,10 @@ command_word_completion_function (hint_text, state)
 	  if (temp)
 	    {
 	      temp++;
-	      freetemp = match = strncmp (temp, hint, hint_len) == 0;
+	      if (igncase == 0)
+		freetemp = match = strncmp (temp, hint, hint_len) == 0;
+	      else
+		freetemp = match = strncasecmp (temp, hint, hint_len) == 0;
 	      if (match)
 		temp = savestring (temp);
 	    }
@@ -2872,10 +2879,6 @@ bash_quote_filename (s, rtype, qcp)
      to perform tilde expansion, because single and double
      quotes inhibit tilde expansion by the shell. */
 
-  mtext = s;
-  if (mtext[0] == '~' && rtype == SINGLE_MATCH)
-    mtext = bash_tilde_expand (s, 0);
-
   cs = completion_quoting_style;
   /* Might need to modify the default completion style based on *qcp,
      since it's set to any user-provided opening quote.  We also change
@@ -2883,7 +2886,7 @@ bash_quote_filename (s, rtype, qcp)
      the word being completed contains newlines, since those are not
      quoted correctly using backslashes (a backslash-newline pair is
      special to the shell parser). */
-  if (*qcp == '\0' && cs == COMPLETE_BSQUOTE && xstrchr (mtext, '\n'))
+  if (*qcp == '\0' && cs == COMPLETE_BSQUOTE && xstrchr (s, '\n'))
     cs = COMPLETE_SQUOTE;
   else if (*qcp == '"')
     cs = COMPLETE_DQUOTE;
@@ -2891,17 +2894,21 @@ bash_quote_filename (s, rtype, qcp)
     cs = COMPLETE_SQUOTE;
 #if defined (BANG_HISTORY)
   else if (*qcp == '\0' && history_expansion && cs == COMPLETE_DQUOTE &&
-	   history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (mtext, '!'))
+	   history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (s, '!'))
     cs = COMPLETE_BSQUOTE;
 
   if (*qcp == '"' && history_expansion && cs == COMPLETE_DQUOTE &&
-	history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (mtext, '!'))
+	history_expansion_inhibited == 0 && xstrchr (s, '!'))
     {
       cs = COMPLETE_BSQUOTE;
       *qcp = '\0';
     }
 #endif
 
+  mtext = s;
+  if (mtext[0] == '~' && rtype == SINGLE_MATCH && cs != COMPLETE_BSQUOTE)
+    mtext = bash_tilde_expand (s, 0);
+
   switch (cs)
     {
     case COMPLETE_DQUOTE:
diff --git a/doc/texinfo.tex b/doc/texinfo.tex
index 1d74826d..555a0770 120000..100644
--- a/doc/texinfo.tex
+++ b/doc/texinfo.tex
@@ -1 +1,6688 @@
-texinfo.tex.20030205
\ No newline at end of file
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{2003-02-03.16}
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+%     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
+%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
+%   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+% 
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+% 
+% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+% 
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+% 
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
+
+% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
+% in some cases the escape char.
+\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
+\chardef\equalChar = `\=
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+\chardef\questChar = `\?
+\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
+\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+% True if #1 is the empty string, i.e., called like `\ifempty{}'.
+%
+\def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}%
+\def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}%
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{%
+  \tracingstats2
+  \tracingpages1
+  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
+  \tracingparagraphs1
+  \tracingoutput1
+  \tracingmacros2
+  \tracingrestores1
+  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+    \tracingscantokens1
+    \tracingifs1
+    \tracinggroups1
+    \tracingnesting2
+    \tracingassigns1
+  \fi
+  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
+  \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
+}%
+
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+% 
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+        \vtop to0pt{%
+          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          }%
+          \vss}%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \vbox to0pt{\vss
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          }%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+        }%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+  \let\next = #1%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+  \else
+    \expandafter\parseargline
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    %
+    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+    %
+    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \ignoreactivespaces
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+    \else
+      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+  % and @{ and @} for the aux file.
+  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+% 
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
+  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+  % above.  But it's pretty close.
+  \def\Egroup{%
+    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+    % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+    \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+    % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+    \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+    % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+    % group, force a page break.
+    \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+      \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+        \page
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \copy\groupbox
+    \endgroup         % End the \group.
+  }%
+  %
+  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
+    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+    \everypar = {\strut}%
+    %
+    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+    % normal interline spacing.
+    \offinterlineskip
+    %
+    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
+    % empty paragraph.
+    \ifx\par\lisppar
+      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+      %
+      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+      \obeylines
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+  \dimen0 = #1\mil
+  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
+  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+    %
+    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+    % And a page break here is fine.
+    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+    %
+    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+    %
+    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+    \penalty9999
+    %
+    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+    \kern -#1\mil
+    %
+    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 2em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+  \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+
+% @page    forces the start of a new page
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
+%
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+%
+\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
+  \nobreak
+  \kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+    \vss
+    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+    \ifx#1l%
+      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+    \else
+      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+    \fi
+    \null
+  }%
+}}
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+%
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+% else use TEXT for both).
+% 
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
+    \def\righttext{#2}%
+  \else
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
+    \def\righttext{#1}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno
+    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`~=\other
+  \catcode`^=\other
+  \catcode`_=\other
+  \catcode`|=\other
+  \catcode`<=\other
+  \catcode`>=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other
+  \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  \let\value=\expandablevalue
+  \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\def\center{\parsearg\docenter}
+\def\docenter#1{{%
+  \ifhmode \hfil\break \fi
+  \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \line{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+  \ifhmode \break \fi
+}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+% 
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
+\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \defaultparindent = 0pt
+    \else
+      \defaultparindent = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @exampleindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
+\def\doexampleindent#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+    \else
+      \lispnarrowing = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
+% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
+% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
+% 
+\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
+% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
+% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
+% 
+{\catcode\underChar = \active
+\gdef\mathunderscore{%
+  \catcode\underChar=\active
+  \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+}}
+%
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
+% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
+% otherwise define @\.
+% 
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+  \tex
+  \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
+  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+  \mathactive
+  \implicitmath\finishmath}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an
+% argument to a command which set the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+% 
+{
+  \catcode`^ = \active
+  \catcode`< = \active
+  \catcode`> = \active
+  \catcode`+ = \active
+  \gdef\mathactive{%
+    \let^ = \ptexhat
+    \let< = \ptexless
+    \let> = \ptexgtr
+    \let+ = \ptexplus
+  }
+}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \iflinks
+     \readauxfile
+   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+   \openindices
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+   \closein1
+   \temp
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+  \newindex{cp}%
+  \newcodeindex{fn}%
+  \newcodeindex{vr}%
+  \newcodeindex{tp}%
+  \newcodeindex{ky}%
+  \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{pdf,}
+% adobe `portable' document format
+\newcount\tempnum
+\newcount\lnkcount
+\newtoks\filename
+\newcount\filenamelength
+\newcount\pgn
+\newtoks\toksA
+\newtoks\toksB
+\newtoks\toksC
+\newtoks\toksD
+\newbox\boxA
+\newcount\countA
+\newif\ifpdf
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+  \pdffalse
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\endlink = \relax
+  \let\linkcolor = \relax
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\else
+  \pdftrue
+  \pdfoutput = 1
+  \input pdfcolor
+  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
+    \def\imageheight{#3}%
+    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+      \immediate\pdfimage
+    \else
+      \immediate\pdfximage
+    \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
+      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
+      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+         #1.pdf%
+       \else
+         {#1.pdf}%
+       \fi
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+    \fi}
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
+  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
+  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
+  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+  % come from Petr Olsak
+  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
+    \advance\tempnum by1
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
+      \closein 1 
+      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks  
+      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
+      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
+      %
+      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
+      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
+      \input \jobname.toc
+      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
+      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
+      %
+      % Make special characters normal for writing to the pdf file.
+      % 
+      \indexnofonts
+      \let\tt=\relax
+      \turnoffactive
+      \input \jobname.toc
+    \endgroup\fi
+  }}
+  \def\makelinks #1,{%
+    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
+    \ifx\params\E
+      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
+    \else
+      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
+      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
+      \picknum{#1}%
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} 
+        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
+      \linkcolor #1%
+      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
+      \endlink
+    \fi
+    \nextmakelinks
+  }
+  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
+  \def\pn#1{%
+    \def\p{#1}%
+    \ifx\p\lbrace
+      \let\nextpn=\ppn
+    \else
+      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
+      \def\first{#1}
+    \fi
+    \nextpn
+  }
+  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
+  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
+  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+        \advance\filenamelength by 1
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \nextsp}
+  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
+  \else
+    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
+  \fi
+  \def\pdfurl#1{%
+    \begingroup
+      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
+      \let\value=\expandablevalue
+      \leavevmode\Red
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+        % #1
+    \endgroup}
+  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+  \def\maketoks{%
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
+    \ifx\first0\adn0
+    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 
+    \else
+      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+        \let\next=\maketoks
+        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \next}
+  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+  \def\pdflink#1{%
+    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
+  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Default leading.
+\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+  % not really supported.
+  \mainmagstep=\magstep1
+  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+  \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you may want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10
+% (in Bob's opinion).
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+\def\authortt{\sectt}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
+% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
+% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
+  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
+}
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\smallfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
+  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\def\smallerfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
+  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
+% If we use \smallerfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
+% 
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
+% 
+% I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.
+% 
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+% 
+\catcode`@=11
+  \def\frenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+  }
+\catcode`@=\other
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\keysy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \frenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+  % just treat them as a normal -.
+  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{%
+  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
+  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+             \else\normalunderscore \fi
+             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+            {\_}%
+}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+  \def\arg{#1}%
+  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle `\arg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is `distinct.'
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
+% a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \pdfurl{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+  \else
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+      \ifpdf
+        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+      \else
+        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+% 
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\ifpdf
+  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+    \unsepspaces
+    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+    \endlink
+  \endgroup}
+\else
+  \let\email=\uref
+\fi
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+%
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
+                   \let\tt=\authortt}%
+   %
+   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+   %
+   % Now you can print the title using @title.
+   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
+                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+   %
+   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+   \let\oldpage = \page
+   \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+         \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \oldpage
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \hbox{}}%
+%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+      \finishtitlepage
+   \fi
+   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+   \oldpage
+   \endgroup
+   %
+   % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+   % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+   \HEADINGSon
+   %
+   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \shortcontents
+     \contents
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \contents
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+   \fi
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
+% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
+% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
+\ifx\today\undefined
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+  \fi
+  \space\number\year}
+\fi
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+% It generates no output of its own.
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  (Unfortunately
+    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+    % \baselineskip glue.)  However, if what follows is an environment
+    % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then
+    % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to
+    % crash together.  So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal
+    % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.
+    % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
+    % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
+    % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
+    % penalty 10001...)
+    \penalty 10001
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+    \noindent
+    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+    % eventually be printed.
+    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+    \unhbox0
+    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+  %
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+%      template}
+% Not:
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+%      {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
+% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
+% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
+% percent of \hsize for this column.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+  \global\advance\colcount by 1
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+  \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+  \def\firstarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+    \let\go = \relax
+  \else
+    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+      \global\setpercenttrue
+    \else
+      \ifsetpercent
+         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+      \else
+         \global\advance\colcount by 1
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+    \else
+      \let\go = \setuptable
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+  \go
+}
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+  \vskip\parskip
+  \let\item=\crcrwithfootnotes
+  % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
+  % line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until
+  % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.  --karl,
+  % nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+  \let\tab=&%
+  \let\startfootins=\startsavedfootnote
+  \tolerance=9500
+  \hbadness=9500
+  \setmultitablespacing
+  \parskip=\multitableparskip
+  \parindent=\multitableparindent
+  \overfullrule=0pt
+  \global\colcount=0
+  \def\Emultitable{%
+    \global\setpercentfalse
+    \crcrwithfootnotes\crcr
+    \egroup\egroup
+  }%
+  %
+  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+  %
+  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+  % The table preamble
+  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+  \everycr{\noalign{%
+  %
+  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
+  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+  %
+  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+  %
+  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+  % the first one.
+  %
+  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+  % to the width of each template entry.
+  %
+  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+  %
+  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+  \rightskip=0pt
+  \ifnum\colcount=1
+    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent \else
+      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+    \fi
+   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+  \fi
+  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+  % For example:
+  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+  % @item @code{#}
+  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+  % characters.
+  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
+\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+\else
+%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+% In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is
+% finished.  Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the
+% main vertical list.  --kasal, 22jan03.
+%
+\newbox\savedfootnotes
+%
+% \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call
+% it instead of starting the insertion right away.
+\def\startsavedfootnote{%
+  \global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup
+    \unvbox\savedfootnotes
+}
+\def\crcrwithfootnotes{%
+  \crcr
+  \ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else
+    \noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\message{conditionals,}
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+  \let\chapter=\relax
+  \let\unnumbered=\relax
+  \let\top=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\section=\relax
+  \let\subsec=\relax
+  \let\subsubsec=\relax
+  \let\subsection=\relax
+  \let\subsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendix=\relax
+  \let\appendixsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\contents=\relax
+  \let\smallbook=\relax
+  \let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+% We use \empty instead of \relax for the @def... commands, so that \end
+% doesn't throw an error.  For instance:
+% @ignore
+% @deffn ...
+% @end deffn
+% @end ignore
+% 
+% The @end deffn is going to get expanded, because we're trying to allow
+% nested conditionals.  But we don't want to expand the actual @deffn,
+% since it might be syntactically correct and intended to be ignored.
+% Since \end checks for \relax, using \empty does not cause an error.
+% 
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+  \let\defcv = \empty
+  \let\defcvx = \empty
+  \let\Edefcv = \empty
+  \let\deffn = \empty
+  \let\deffnx = \empty
+  \let\Edeffn = \empty
+  \let\defindex = \relax
+  \let\defivar = \empty
+  \let\defivarx = \empty
+  \let\Edefivar = \empty
+  \let\defmac = \empty
+  \let\defmacx = \empty
+  \let\Edefmac = \empty
+  \let\defmethod = \empty
+  \let\defmethodx = \empty
+  \let\Edefmethod = \empty
+  \let\defop = \empty
+  \let\defopx = \empty
+  \let\Edefop = \empty
+  \let\defopt = \empty
+  \let\defoptx = \empty
+  \let\Edefopt = \empty
+  \let\defspec = \empty
+  \let\defspecx = \empty
+  \let\Edefspec = \empty
+  \let\deftp = \empty
+  \let\deftpx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftp = \empty
+  \let\deftypefn = \empty
+  \let\deftypefnx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypefn = \empty
+  \let\deftypefun = \empty
+  \let\deftypefunx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypefun = \empty
+  \let\deftypeivar = \empty
+  \let\deftypeivarx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypeivar = \empty
+  \let\deftypemethod = \empty
+  \let\deftypemethodx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypemethod = \empty
+  \let\deftypeop = \empty
+  \let\deftypeopx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypeop = \empty
+  \let\deftypevar = \empty
+  \let\deftypevarx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypevar = \empty
+  \let\deftypevr = \empty
+  \let\deftypevrx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypevr = \empty
+  \let\defun = \empty
+  \let\defunx = \empty
+  \let\Edefun = \empty
+  \let\defvar = \empty
+  \let\defvarx = \empty
+  \let\Edefvar = \empty
+  \let\defvr = \empty
+  \let\defvrx = \empty
+  \let\Edefvr = \empty
+  \let\clear = \relax
+  \let\down = \relax
+  \let\evenfooting = \relax
+  \let\evenheading = \relax
+  \let\everyfooting = \relax
+  \let\everyheading = \relax
+  \let\headings = \relax
+  \let\include = \relax
+  \let\item = \relax
+  \let\lowersections = \relax
+  \let\oddfooting = \relax
+  \let\oddheading = \relax
+  \let\printindex = \relax
+  \let\pxref = \relax
+  \let\raisesections = \relax
+  \let\ref = \relax
+  \let\set = \relax
+  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+  \let\settitle = \relax
+  \let\up = \relax
+  \let\verbatiminclude = \relax
+  \let\xref = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+%
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+  \ignoresections
+  %
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \catcode\spaceChar = 10
+  %
+  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+  \catcode`\{ = 9
+  \catcode`\} = 9
+  %
+  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+  \catcode`\@ = 12
+  %
+  \def\ignoreword{#1}%
+  \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
+    % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
+    % `documentdescription' contains a `c'.  Means not everything will
+    % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
+  \else
+    % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+    % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+    %   @c @end ifinfo
+    % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+    % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+    \catcode`\c = 14
+  \fi
+  %
+  % And now expand the command defined above.
+  \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/non-gnu/TeX.README.)}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+    \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+  \obstexwarn
+  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
+  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
+  % the chance of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+  % page 401 of the TeXbook.
+  %
+  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+    \ignoresections
+    %
+    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+    % @end command again.
+    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    %
+    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
+    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+    % undefine them.
+    %
+    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+    \ignoremorecommands
+    %
+    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
+    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because some sites
+    % might not have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
+    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+    % stuff compared to the main input.
+    %
+    \nullfont
+    \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
+    \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
+    \let\tensf=\nullfont
+    % Similarly for index fonts.
+    \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
+    \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
+    \let\smallsf=\nullfont
+    % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
+    \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
+    \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
+    \let\smallersf=\nullfont
+    %
+    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+    \tracinglostchars = 0
+    %
+    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+    \frenchspacing
+    %
+    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+    \hbadness = 10000
+    %
+    % Do minimal line-breaking.
+    \pretolerance = 10000
+    %
+    % Do not execute instructions in @tex.
+    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+    % Do not execute macro definitions.
+    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  %
+  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
+  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+  \gdef\value{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+    \valuexxx}
+}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable
+% is set), since the result winds up in the index file.  This means that
+% if the variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost
+% certain it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with
+% sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of
+% complete).
+%
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\doifset}
+\def\doifset#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \let\next=\ifsetfail
+  \else
+    \let\next=\ifsetsucceed
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\doifclear}
+\def\doifclear#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \let\next=\ifclearsucceed
+  \else
+    \let\next=\ifclearfail
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
+% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make
+% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
+
+% True conditional.  Since \set globally defines its variables, we can
+% just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at
+% the outer level).
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}%
+}
+
+% @defininfoenclose.
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
+    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+%
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+%
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+%
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+% 
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+% 
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
+
+% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
+% #3 the target index (bar).
+\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
+  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
+  % closing the target index.
+  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
+    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
+  \fi
+  % redefine \fooindfile:
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
+  % redefine \fooindex:
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+% 
+\def\indexdummies{%
+  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  
+  \let\{ = \mylbrace
+  \let\} = \myrbrace
+  %
+  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
+  % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control
+  % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
+  % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+  % from whatever follows.
+  % 
+  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+  % space.
+  % 
+  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+  % 
+  \def\definedummyword##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
+  }%
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+}
+
+% For the aux file, @ is the escape character.  So we want to redefine
+% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash.  When everything uses 
+% @, this will be simpler.
+% 
+\def\atdummies{%
+  \def\@{@@}%
+  \def\ {@ }%
+  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+  %
+  % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
+  \def\definedummyword##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
+  }%
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+}
+
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and
+% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
+% 
+\def\commondummies{%
+  %
+  \normalturnoffactive
+  %
+  % Control letters and accents.
+  \definedummyletter{_}%
+  \definedummyletter{,}%
+  \definedummyletter{"}%
+  \definedummyletter{`}%
+  \definedummyletter{'}%
+  \definedummyletter{^}%
+  \definedummyletter{~}%
+  \definedummyletter{=}%
+  \definedummyword{u}%
+  \definedummyword{v}%
+  \definedummyword{H}%
+  \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
+  \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{dotless}%
+  %
+  % Other non-English letters.
+  \definedummyword{AA}%
+  \definedummyword{AE}%
+  \definedummyword{L}%
+  \definedummyword{OE}%
+  \definedummyword{O}%
+  \definedummyword{aa}%
+  \definedummyword{ae}%
+  \definedummyword{l}%
+  \definedummyword{oe}%
+  \definedummyword{o}%
+  \definedummyword{ss}%
+  %
+  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+  \definedummyword{bf}%
+  \definedummyword{gtr}%
+  \definedummyword{hat}%
+  \definedummyword{less}%
+  \definedummyword{sf}%
+  \definedummyword{sl}%
+  \definedummyword{tclose}%
+  \definedummyword{tt}%
+  %
+  % Texinfo font commands.
+  \definedummyword{b}%
+  \definedummyword{i}%
+  \definedummyword{r}%
+  \definedummyword{sc}%
+  \definedummyword{t}%
+  %
+  \definedummyword{TeX}%
+  \definedummyword{acronym}%
+  \definedummyword{cite}%
+  \definedummyword{code}%
+  \definedummyword{command}%
+  \definedummyword{dfn}%
+  \definedummyword{dots}%
+  \definedummyword{emph}%
+  \definedummyword{env}%
+  \definedummyword{file}%
+  \definedummyword{kbd}%
+  \definedummyword{key}%
+  \definedummyword{math}%
+  \definedummyword{option}%
+  \definedummyword{samp}%
+  \definedummyword{strong}%
+  \definedummyword{uref}%
+  \definedummyword{url}%
+  \definedummyword{var}%
+  \definedummyword{w}%
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  \definedummyword{bullet}%
+  \definedummyword{copyright}%
+  \definedummyword{dots}%
+  \definedummyword{enddots}%
+  \definedummyword{equiv}%
+  \definedummyword{error}%
+  \definedummyword{expansion}%
+  \definedummyword{minus}%
+  \definedummyword{pounds}%
+  \definedummyword{point}%
+  \definedummyword{print}%
+  \definedummyword{result}%
+  %
+  % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+  % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
+  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+  \let\value = \expandablevalue
+  %
+  % Normal spaces, not active ones.
+  \unsepspaces
+  %
+  % No macro expansion.
+  \turnoffmacros
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+%
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+  \def\ { }%
+  \def\@{@}%
+  % how to handle braces?
+  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+  %
+  \let\,=\asis
+  \let\"=\asis
+  \let\`=\asis
+  \let\'=\asis
+  \let\^=\asis
+  \let\~=\asis
+  \let\==\asis
+  \let\u=\asis
+  \let\v=\asis
+  \let\H=\asis
+  \let\dotaccent=\asis
+  \let\ringaccent=\asis
+  \let\tieaccent=\asis
+  \let\ubaraccent=\asis
+  \let\udotaccent=\asis
+  \let\dotless=\asis
+  %
+  % Other non-English letters.
+  \def\AA{AA}%
+  \def\AE{AE}%
+  \def\L{L}%
+  \def\OE{OE}%
+  \def\O{O}%
+  \def\aa{aa}%
+  \def\ae{ae}%
+  \def\l{l}%
+  \def\oe{oe}%
+  \def\o{o}%
+  \def\ss{ss}%
+  \def\exclamdown{!}%
+  \def\questiondown{?}%
+  %
+  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+  %\let\tt=\asis
+  %
+  % Texinfo font commands.
+  \let\b=\asis
+  \let\i=\asis
+  \let\r=\asis
+  \let\sc=\asis
+  \let\t=\asis
+  %
+  \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+  \let\acronym=\asis
+  \let\cite=\asis
+  \let\code=\asis
+  \let\command=\asis
+  \let\dfn=\asis
+  \let\dots=\indexdummydots
+  \let\emph=\asis
+  \let\env=\asis
+  \let\file=\asis
+  \let\kbd=\asis
+  \let\key=\asis
+  \let\math=\asis
+  \let\option=\asis
+  \let\samp=\asis
+  \let\strong=\asis
+  \let\uref=\asis
+  \let\url=\asis
+  \let\var=\asis
+  \let\w=\asis
+}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+%
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+  \fi
+  {%
+    \count255=\lastpenalty
+    {%
+      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+      \escapechar=`\\
+      {%
+        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+        %
+        % The main index entry text.
+        \toks0 = {#2}%
+        %
+        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+           % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
+           % line to write.
+          \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+        % get the string to sort by.
+        {\indexnofonts
+         \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+         \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+        % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+        % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+        % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+        % sorted result.
+        \edef\temp{%
+          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+        % like this:
+        % @end defun
+        % @tindex whatever
+        % @defun ...
+        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+        % the previous defun.
+        %
+        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+        %
+        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+        %
+        \iflinks
+          \ifvmode
+            \skip0 = \lastskip
+            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\skip0 \fi
+          \fi
+          %
+          \temp % do the write
+          %
+          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }%
+    \penalty\count255
+  }%
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \indexbreaks
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+  % \initial {@}
+  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+  \catcode`\@ = 11
+  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    \putwordIndexNonexistent
+  \else
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \temp
+    \ifeof 1
+      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \catcode`\\ = 0
+      \escapechar = `\\
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+  %
+  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+  \removelastskip
+  %
+  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  \penalty -300
+  %
+  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
+  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+  %
+  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+  %
+  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+  \nobreak
+}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+  %
+  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+  % affect previous text.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+  \parfillskip = 0in
+  %
+  % No extra space above this paragraph.
+  \parskip = 0in
+  %
+  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+  %
+  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+  %
+  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+  \hangindent = 2em
+  %
+  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+  % with blank space.
+  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+  %
+  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+  %
+  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+  #1%
+  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+  \def\tempb{#2}%
+  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+    %
+    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+    \hfil\penalty50
+    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    %
+    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+    % \hbox ensues.
+    \ifpdf
+      \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+    \else
+      \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+    \fi
+  \fi%
+  \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+\def\secondary#1#2{{%
+  \parfillskip=0in
+  \parskip=0in
+  \hangindent=1in
+  \hangafter=1
+  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \else
+    #2
+  \fi
+  \par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {%
+    %
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
+    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+      % Unvbox the main output page.
+      \unvbox\PAGE
+      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+    }%
+  }%
+  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
+  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@ = \vsize
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
+  %
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox255
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+%
+% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  %
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+% 
+% All done with double columns.
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  \output = {%
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
+    % current page, no automatic page break.
+    \balancecolumns
+    %
+    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+  }%
+  \eject
+  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+  %
+  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
+  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+  \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+%
+% Called at the end of the double column material.
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+  {%
+    \vbadness = 10000
+    \loop
+      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+    \repeat
+  }%
+  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  %
+  \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+\def\appendixletter{%
+  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
+  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
+  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
+  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
+  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
+  \else\char\the\appendixno
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \chapterzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+  \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+  \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+  \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+  % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+  % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+  \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+  \writetocentry{chap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
+  \donoderef
+  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% we use \chapno to avoid indenting back
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} \the\chapno}%
+  \hbox to \wd0{#1\hss}}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+  \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+  \global\advance \appendixno by 1
+  \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+  \chapmacro {#1}{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+  \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+  \writetocentry{appendix}{#1}{{\appendixletter}}
+  \appendixnoderef
+  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+  \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+  %
+  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+  % to be executed, not expanded).
+  %
+  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+  % the toc entries.)
+  \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+  %
+  \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+  \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbchap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
+  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+  \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+  \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
+  \donoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+  \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+  \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}
+  \appendixnoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+  \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+  \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+  \donoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+  \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+  \appendixnoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+  \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+  \subsubsecheading {#1}
+    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+  \donoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+  \subsubsecheading {#1}
+    {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+  \appendixnoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+  \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbsubsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+%          overlong headings to fold.
+%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                    \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                    \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    \def\chapnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+    \leftskip = \rightskip
+    \parfillskip = 0pt
+  }%
+  \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt
+                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+  }%
+  {%
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+    \def\secnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    %
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #3}%
+  }%
+  % Add extra space after the heading -- either a line space or a
+  % paragraph space, whichever is more.  (Some people like to set
+  % \parskip to large values for some reason.)  Don't allow stretch, though.
+  \nobreak
+  \ifdim\parskip>\normalbaselineskip
+    \kern\parskip
+  \else
+    \kern\normalbaselineskip
+  \fi
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+% Table of contents.
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+%
+% Usage: \writetocentry{chap}{The Name of The Game}{{\the\chapno}}
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+  \iftocfileopened\else
+    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+  \fi
+  %
+  \iflinks
+    \toks0 = {#2}%
+    \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}#3{\folio}}}%
+    \temp
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
+  % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't
+  % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
+  % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
+  % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
+  % two named `2'.
+  \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+   \contentsalignmacro
+   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+   %
+   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+   \savepageno = \pageno
+   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+      %
+      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+      \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+     \ifeof 1 \else
+       \closein 1
+       \input \jobname.toc
+     \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+     \pdfmakeoutlines
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+      %
+      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+      \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+      \secfonts
+      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+      \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+      \rm
+      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+      \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
+      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+      \ifeof 1 \else
+        \closein 1
+        \input \jobname.toc
+      \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+\ifpdf
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
+\fi
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapters, in the main contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+%
+% Chapters, in the short toc.
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
+}
+
+% Appendices, in the main contents.
+\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{%
+  \dochapentry{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} #2}\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+%
+% Appendices, in the short toc.
+\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+%
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % But use \hss just in case.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  \dimen0 = 1em
+  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
+}
+
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#1}{#3}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2#3{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#6}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
+  % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+  \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+% @foo ... @end foo.
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+% 
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+%
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+% 
+\newbox\errorbox
+%
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+%
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+%
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\%=14
+  \catcode `\+=\other
+  \catcode `\"=\other
+  \catcode `\==\other
+  \catcode `\|=\other
+  \catcode `\<=\other
+  \catcode `\>=\other
+  \escapechar=`\\
+  %
+  \let\b=\ptexb
+  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+  \let\c=\ptexc
+  \let\,=\ptexcomma
+  \let\.=\ptexdot
+  \let\dots=\ptexdots
+  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+  \let\!=\ptexexclam
+  \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+  \let\+=\tabalign
+  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\*=\ptexstar
+  \let\t=\ptext
+  %
+  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+  \def\@{@}%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.
+  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+    \endgraf
+    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+      \removelastskip
+      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+      % or better ...
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \else \penalty-50 \fi
+      \vskip\envskipamount
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\def\cartouche{%
+\par  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+\begingroup
+        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+        \cartouter=\hsize
+        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
+%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
+        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+        \vbox\bgroup
+                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+                \carttop
+                \hbox\bgroup
+                        \hskip\lskip
+                        \vrule\kern3pt
+                        \vbox\bgroup
+                                \hsize=\cartinner
+                                \kern3pt
+                                \begingroup
+                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
+                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
+                                        \parskip=\normpskip
+                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+                                \endgroup
+                                \kern3pt
+                        \egroup
+                        \kern3pt\vrule
+                        \hskip\rskip
+                \egroup
+                \cartbot
+        \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+  % at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+%
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
+}
+
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallexamplefonts
+  \lisp
+}
+\let\smallexample = \smalllisp
+
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+%
+% @smalldisplay: @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \display
+}
+
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+%
+% @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \gobble
+}
+
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \parindent=0pt
+  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 
+% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
+% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
+%
+% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
+%
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
+\def\dospecials{%
+  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 380
+\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
+%
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
+\endgroup
+%
+% Setup for the @verb command.
+%
+% Eight spaces for a tab
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\setupverb{%
+  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+  \catcode`\`=\active
+  \tabeightspaces
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+}
+
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+%
+% Real tab expansion
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+%
+\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabexpand{%
+    \catcode`\^^I=\active
+    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
+      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
+    }%
+  }
+\endgroup
+\def\setupverbatim{%
+  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \tt
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
+  \catcode`\`=\active
+  \tabexpand
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+}
+
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 
+% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a 
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+%
+%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
+  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+%
+%
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+%
+%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
+%
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+%
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
+%% \begingroup
+%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
+%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
+%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
+%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
+%% |endgroup
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\ =\active
+  \obeylines %
+  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
+  % line in the output.
+  \gdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\end{verbatim}}%
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verbatim{%
+  \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \begingroup
+    \nonfillstart
+    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+    \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
+}
+
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+%
+% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\verbatiminclude{%
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\\=\other
+    \catcode`~=\other
+    \catcode`^=\other
+    \catcode`_=\other
+    \catcode`|=\other
+    \catcode`<=\other
+    \catcode`>=\other
+    \catcode`+=\other
+    \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
+}
+\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
+  \begingroup
+    \nonfillstart
+    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+    \begingroup\setupverbatim
+}
+%
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+     % Restore active chars for included file.
+  \endgroup
+  \begingroup
+    \let\value=\expandablevalue
+    \def\thisfile{#1}%
+    \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
+  \endgroup
+  \nonfillfinish
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @copying ... @end copying.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.  Many commands won't be
+% allowed in this context, but that's ok.
+% 
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
+% 
+\def\copying{\begingroup
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.
+  % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the
+  % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read
+  % it, but that doesn't matter.
+  \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}%
+  %
+  % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.
+  \catcode`\^^M = \active
+  \docopying
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off the copying text.
+%
+\def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
+
+% @insertcopying.  Here we must play games with ^^M's.  On the one hand,
+% we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
+% must be active.  On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
+% end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
+% definition of ^^M.  On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
+% generate a \par.
+% 
+% Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
+% then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1.  If it does, then manually
+% do \par.
+% 
+% This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
+% it.  Similarly for @ignore.  (These commands are used in the gcc
+% manual for man page generation.)
+% 
+% Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
+% fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
+% should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
+%
+{\catcode`\^^M=\active %
+\gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
+  \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
+  \def^^M{%
+    \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
+      \par %
+    \else %
+      \space \penalty 1 %
+    \fi %
+  }%
+  %
+  % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
+  \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
+  \let\comment = \c %
+  %
+  % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
+  % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
+  \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
+  %
+  \copyingtext %
+\endgroup}%
+}
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont#1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+% 
+\def\activeparens{%
+  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+  \catcode`\&=\active
+  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\let\ampnr = \&
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
+{
+  \catcode`& = \active
+  \global\let& = \ampnr
+}
+
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the function name.
+% #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".
+%
+\def\defname#1#2{%
+  % How we'll output the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+  % just below it.
+  \ifempty{#2}%
+    \def\defnametype{}%
+  \else
+    \def\defnametype{[\rm #2]}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+  \dimen2=\leftskip
+  \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+  %
+  % Figure out values for the paragraph shape.
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}%
+  \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0  % compute size for first line
+  \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent  % size for continuations
+  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+  %
+  % Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of
+  % width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+   % so that \rightline will obey them.
+   \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+   \dimen3 = 0pt  % was -1.25pc
+   \rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  {\df #1}\enskip        % output function name
+  % \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.
+}
+
+% Common pieces to start any @def...
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
+% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
+% 
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup\inENV
+  % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+  % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+  % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
+  % break after all.  Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
+  % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+  % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
+  % between a section heading and a defun.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty0 \fi
+  \medbreak
+  %
+  % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
+  % so that it will exit this group.
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  %
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+}
+
+% Common part of the \...x definitions.
+% 
+\def\defxbodycommon{%
+  % As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple
+  % x headers in a row.  It's not a great place, though.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10000 \penalty1000 \fi
+  %
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
+%
+\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}%
+  \catcode\equalChar=\active
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit#3%
+}
+
+% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+%
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  % The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as
+  %   @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma}
+  % See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have
+  % to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty
+}
+
+% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
+% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
+% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
+%
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
+}
+
+% Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
+% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
+% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
+% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
+% input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
+% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
+% 
+\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {\def#4{##1}%
+    \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
+}
+
+% For @defop.
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+    \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
+}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+%
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2{\defxbodycommon \spacesplit#3}%
+  \catcode\equalChar=\active
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit#3%
+}
+
+% @defopvar.
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+    \defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+% Split up #2 (the rest of the input line) at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+%
+{\obeylines %
+ \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}%
+ \long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{%
+   \ifx\relax #3%
+     #1{#2}{}%
+   \else %
+     #1{#2}{#3#4}%
+   \fi}%
+}
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% This is called to end the arguments processing for all the @def... commands.
+%
+\def\defargscommonending{%
+  \interlinepenalty = 10000
+  \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+  \endgraf
+  \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+  \penalty 10002  % signal to \parsebodycommon.
+}
+
+% This expands the args and terminates the paragraph they comprise.
+% 
+\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
+#1%
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+  \defargscommonending
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+  \defargscommonending
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+%               at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+%
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+%
+\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% function index entry
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
+  \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
+                       \deftypeopcategory}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
+            {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
+%
+\def\deftypeivar{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
+\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
+            {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% variable index entry
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
+%
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+%
+\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in var index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defvar
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+  \defargscommonending
+}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
+  \defargscommonending
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
+  \defargscommonending
+\endgroup}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+% 
+\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
+   % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+   \toks0={#1\endinput}%
+   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+   \input \jobname.tmp
+   \endgroup
+}
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+\fi
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
+                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
+
+% Utility routines.
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
+  \catcode`\{=\other
+  \catcode`\}=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+  \usembodybackslash}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\\=\other}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+  \fi
+  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
+     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
+       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+  \fi}
+
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\dounmacro}
+\def\dounmacro#1{%
+  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
+    \begingroup
+      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+      \let\do\unmacrodo
+      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+% 
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+    % remove this
+  \else
+    \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifrecursive
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+        \egroup
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+      \paramlist{%
+          \egroup
+          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+    \expandafter\parsearg
+  \fi \next}
+
+% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
+% expanded by \write.
+\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
+  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+% @alias.
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
+\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
+           \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+% @xref etc.
+
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\newcount\savesfregister
+\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), namely NAME-title (the corresponding @chapter/etc. name),
+% NAME-pg (the page number), and NAME-snt (section number and type).
+% Called from \foonoderef.
+% 
+% We have to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section
+% title aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in
+% the first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+%
+% Likewise, use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names.
+% 
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+  \atdummies
+  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+  %
+  \turnoffactive
+  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
+}}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  \ifpdf
+    \leavevmode
+    \getfilename{#4}%
+    {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
+     \else
+       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+         goto name{#1}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+    \linkcolor
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  \else
+    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+    {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+    }%
+    % [mynode],
+    [\printednodename],\space
+    % page 3
+    \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is called from \setref to do the actual \write (\iflinks).
+%
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+  {\let\folio=0%
+   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+   \iflinks \next \fi
+  }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into
+%   CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...}
+\def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.
+% 
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie
+      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+%
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  {%
+    \indexnofonts
+    \otherbackslash
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+      \csname X#1\endcsname
+  }%
+  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+    \iflinks
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \thisrefX
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  %
+  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+  %
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  {%
+    \count 1=128
+    \def\loop{%
+      \catcode\count 1=\other
+      \advance\count 1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+  % For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  % @ is our escape character in .aux files.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\@=0
+  %
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \closein 1
+    \input \jobname.aux
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+  \fi
+  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \dofootnote
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+% The start of the footnote looks usually like this:
+\gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup}
+%
+% ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.
+%
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+  \startfootins
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \hsize=\pagewidth
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  %
+  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
+  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
+  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
+  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
+  \let\noindent = \relax
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
+  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
+  \everypar = {\hang}%
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  \closein 1
+  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+      \global\warnednoepsftrue
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
+% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\newif\ifimagevmode
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
+  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
+  % If the image is by itself, center it.
+  \ifvmode
+    \imagevmodetrue
+    \nobreak\bigskip
+    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+    % above and below. 
+    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+    \nobreak
+    \line\bgroup\hss
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Output the image.
+  \ifpdf
+    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \else
+    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
+\endgroup}
+
+
+\message{localization,}
+% and i18n.
+
+% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
+% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
+% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
+% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
+%
+\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
+\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
+  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+  % Read the file if it exists.
+  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+  \ifeof1
+    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+    \let\temp = \relax
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+  \endgroup
+}
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
+should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+
+% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
+% likely, but for now just recognize it.
+\let\documentencoding = \comment
+
+
+% Page size parameters.
+%
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+  \else
+    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
+% physical page width.
+% 
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
+  \voffset = #3\relax
+  \topskip = #6\relax
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  %
+  \vsize = #1\relax
+  \advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \outervsize = \vsize
+  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+  \pageheight = \vsize
+  %
+  \hsize = #2\relax
+  \outerhsize = \hsize
+  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \pagewidth = \hsize
+  %
+  \normaloffset = #4\relax
+  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+  %
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+  \fi
+  %
+  \setleading{\textleading}
+  %
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+  \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
+  %
+  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+                    {11in}{8.5in}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+  \textleading = 12pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+                    {9.25in}{7in}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .5cm
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
+  %
+  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 
+  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
+  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
+  % your texinfo source file like this:
+  % @tex
+  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+  % @end tex
+  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  %
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 5mm
+}}
+
+% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
+% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
+% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
+\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
+  \textleading = 12.5pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+                    {210mm}{148mm}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
+  \tolerance = 800
+  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 2mm
+  \tableindent = 12mm
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  %
+  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \globaldefs = 1
+  %
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{\textleading}%
+  %
+  \dimen0 = #1
+  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+  %
+  \dimen2 = \hsize
+  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\catcode`\$=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
+% this is not a problem.
+\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+\catcode`\$=\active
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+ @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx}
+ @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+}
+
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{%
+  @let"=@normaldoublequote
+  @let\=@realbackslash
+  @let~=@normaltilde
+  @let^=@normalcaret
+  @let_=@normalunderscore
+  @let|=@normalverticalbar
+  @let<=@normalless
+  @let>=@normalgreater
+  @let+=@normalplus
+  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
+% effect.)
+% 
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{%
+  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @catcode`+=@active
+  @catcode`@_=@active
+}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+@escapechar = `@@
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  
+@catcode`@& = @other
+@catcode`@# = @other
+@catcode`@% = @other
+
+@c Set initial fonts.
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
diff --git a/execute_cmd.c b/execute_cmd.c
index 2aeaafd7..ce90d25b 100644
--- a/execute_cmd.c
+++ b/execute_cmd.c
@@ -2753,7 +2753,9 @@ execute_simple_command (simple_command, pipe_in, pipe_out, async, fds_to_close)
 	 vast majority of cases. */
       maybe_make_export_env ();
 
-      if (make_child (savestring (the_printed_command), async) == 0)
+      /* Don't let a DEBUG trap overwrite the command string to be saved with
+	 the process/job associated with this child. */
+      if (make_child (savestring (the_printed_command_except_trap), async) == 0)
 	{
 	  already_forked = 1;
 	  simple_command->flags |= CMD_NO_FORK;
diff --git a/execute_cmd.c~ b/execute_cmd.c~
index 7d405e8f..ec60b773 100644
--- a/execute_cmd.c~
+++ b/execute_cmd.c~
@@ -2753,7 +2753,11 @@ execute_simple_command (simple_command, pipe_in, pipe_out, async, fds_to_close)
 	 vast majority of cases. */
       maybe_make_export_env ();
 
+#if 0
       if (make_child (savestring (the_printed_command), async) == 0)
+#else
+      if (make_child (savestring (the_printed_command_except_trap), async) == 0)
+#endif
 	{
 	  already_forked = 1;
 	  simple_command->flags |= CMD_NO_FORK;
@@ -3875,8 +3879,6 @@ shell_execve (command, args, env)
 	      interp = getinterp (sample, sample_len, (int *)NULL);
 	      ilen = strlen (interp);
 	      errno = i;
-itrace("shell_execve: interp = `%s', ilen = %d", interp, ilen);
-itrace("shell_execve: interp[ilen - 1] = %d", interp[ilen - 1]);
 	      if (interp[ilen - 1] == '\r')
 		{
 		  interp = xrealloc (interp, ilen + 2);
diff --git a/jobs.c~ b/jobs.c~
index a7b3f917..6e237dd7 100644
--- a/jobs.c~
+++ b/jobs.c~
@@ -63,17 +63,6 @@
 #  include <bsdtty.h>
 #endif /* hpux && !TERMIOS_TTY_DRIVER */
 
-#if !defined (STRUCT_WINSIZE_IN_SYS_IOCTL)
-/* For struct winsize on SCO */
-/*   sys/ptem.h has winsize but needs mblk_t from sys/stream.h */
-#  if defined (HAVE_SYS_PTEM_H) && defined (TIOCGWINSZ) && defined (SIGWINCH)
-#    if defined (HAVE_SYS_STREAM_H)
-#      include <sys/stream.h>
-#    endif
-#    include <sys/ptem.h>
-#  endif /* HAVE_SYS_PTEM_H && TIOCGWINSZ && SIGWINCH */
-#endif /* !STRUCT_WINSIZE_IN_SYS_IOCTL */
-
 #include "bashansi.h"
 #include "bashintl.h"
 #include "shell.h"
@@ -142,10 +131,6 @@ extern int errno;
 
 typedef int sh_job_map_func_t __P((JOB *, int, int, int));
 
-#if defined (READLINE)
-extern void rl_set_screen_size __P((int, int));
-#endif
-
 /* Variables used here but defined in other files. */
 extern int subshell_environment, line_number;
 extern int posixly_correct, shell_level;
@@ -160,6 +145,7 @@ extern procenv_t wait_intr_buf;
 extern int wait_signal_received;
 extern WORD_LIST *subst_assign_varlist;
 
+static struct jobstats zerojs = { -1L, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, NO_JOB, NO_JOB, 0, 0 };
 struct jobstats js = { -1L, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, NO_JOB, NO_JOB, 0, 0 };
 
 struct bgpids bgpids = { 0, 0, 0 };
@@ -223,13 +209,10 @@ int check_window_size;
 
 /* Functions local to this file. */
 
-static void get_new_window_size __P((int));
-
 static void run_sigchld_trap __P((int));
 
 static sighandler wait_sigint_handler __P((int));
 static sighandler sigchld_handler __P((int));
-static sighandler sigwinch_sighandler __P((int));
 static sighandler sigcont_sighandler __P((int));
 static sighandler sigstop_sighandler __P((int));
 
@@ -312,10 +295,6 @@ static int queue_sigchld;
 static SigHandler *old_tstp, *old_ttou, *old_ttin;
 static SigHandler *old_cont = (SigHandler *)SIG_DFL;
 
-#if defined (TIOCGWINSZ) && defined (SIGWINCH)
-static SigHandler *old_winch = (SigHandler *)SIG_DFL;
-#endif
-
 /* A place to temporarily save the current pipeline. */
 static PROCESS *saved_pipeline;
 static int saved_already_making_children;
@@ -349,6 +328,13 @@ tcgetpgrp (fd)
 
 #endif /* !_POSIX_VERSION */
 
+/* Initialize the global job stats structure. */
+void
+init_job_stats ()
+{
+  js = zerojs;
+}
+
 /* Return the working directory for the current process.  Unlike
    job_working_directory, this does not call malloc (), nor do any
    of the functions it calls.  This is so that it can safely be called
@@ -410,11 +396,16 @@ stop_making_children ()
 void
 cleanup_the_pipeline ()
 {
-  if (the_pipeline)
-    {
-      discard_pipeline (the_pipeline);
-      the_pipeline = (PROCESS *)NULL;
-    }
+  PROCESS *disposer;
+  sigset_t set, oset;
+
+  BLOCK_CHILD (set, oset);
+  disposer = the_pipeline;
+  the_pipeline = (PROCESS *)NULL;
+  UNBLOCK_CHILD (oset);
+
+  if (disposer)
+    discard_pipeline (disposer);
 }
 
 void
@@ -422,9 +413,9 @@ save_pipeline (clear)
      int clear;
 {
   saved_pipeline = the_pipeline;
-  saved_already_making_children = already_making_children;
   if (clear)
     the_pipeline = (PROCESS *)NULL;
+  saved_already_making_children = already_making_children;
 }
 
 void
@@ -1019,6 +1010,7 @@ add_process (name, pid)
     }
 #endif
 
+itrace("add_process: %s %d", name, pid);
   t = (PROCESS *)xmalloc (sizeof (PROCESS));
   t->next = the_pipeline;
   t->pid = pid;
@@ -1984,6 +1976,13 @@ wait_for_single_pid (pid)
     jobs[job]->flags |= J_NOTIFIED;
   UNBLOCK_CHILD (oset);
 
+  /* If running in posix mode, remove the job from the jobs table immediately */
+  if (posixly_correct)
+    {
+      cleanup_dead_jobs ();
+      bgp_delete (pid);
+    }
+
   return r;
 }
 
@@ -2635,7 +2634,7 @@ start_job (job, foreground)
   register PROCESS *p;
   int already_running;
   sigset_t set, oset;
-  char *wd;
+  char *wd, *s;
   static TTYSTRUCT save_stty;
 
   BLOCK_CHILD (set, oset);
@@ -2653,7 +2652,7 @@ start_job (job, foreground)
     {
       internal_error (_("%s: job %d already in background"), this_command_name, job + 1);
       UNBLOCK_CHILD (oset);
-      return (-1);
+      return (0);		/* XPG6/SUSv3 says this is not an error */
     }
 
   wd = current_working_directory ();
@@ -2671,8 +2670,15 @@ start_job (job, foreground)
   p = jobs[job]->pipe;
 
   if (foreground == 0)
-    printf ("[%d]%c ", job + 1,
-	   (job == js.j_current) ? '+': ((job == js.j_previous) ? '-' : ' '));
+    {
+      /* POSIX.2 says `bg' doesn't give any indication about current or
+	 previous job. */
+      if (posixly_correct == 0)
+	s = (job == js.j_current) ? "+ ": ((job == js.j_previous) ? "- " : " ");       
+      else
+	s = " ";
+      printf ("[%d]%s", job + 1, s);
+    }
 
   do
     {
@@ -2744,9 +2750,17 @@ kill_pid (pid, sig, group)
      int sig, group;
 {
   register PROCESS *p;
-  int job, result;
+  int job, result, negative;
   sigset_t set, oset;
 
+  if (pid < -1)
+    {
+      pid = -pid;
+      group = negative = 1;
+    }
+  else
+    negative = 0;
+
   result = EXECUTION_SUCCESS;
   if (group)
     {
@@ -2758,8 +2772,26 @@ kill_pid (pid, sig, group)
 	  jobs[job]->flags &= ~J_NOTIFIED;
 
 	  /* Kill process in backquotes or one started without job control? */
-	  if (jobs[job]->pgrp == shell_pgrp)
+
+	  /* If we're passed a pid < -1, just call killpg and see what happens  */
+	  if (negative && jobs[job]->pgrp == shell_pgrp)
 	    result = killpg (pid, sig);
+	  /* If we're killing using job control notification, for example,
+	     without job control active, we have to do things ourselves. */
+	  else if (jobs[job]->pgrp == shell_pgrp)
+	    {
+	      p = jobs[job]->pipe;
+	      do
+		{
+		  if (PALIVE (p) == 0)
+		    continue;		/* avoid pid recycling problem */
+		  kill (p->pid, sig);
+		  if (PEXITED (p) && (sig == SIGTERM || sig == SIGHUP))
+		    kill (p->pid, SIGCONT);
+		  p = p->next;
+		}
+	      while  (p != jobs[job]->pipe);
+	    }
 	  else
 	    {
 	      result = killpg (jobs[job]->pgrp, sig);
@@ -3493,60 +3525,6 @@ set_new_line_discipline (tty)
 #endif
 }
 
-#if defined (TIOCGWINSZ) && defined (SIGWINCH)
-static void
-get_new_window_size (from_sig)
-     int from_sig;
-{
-  struct winsize win;
-
-  if ((ioctl (shell_tty, TIOCGWINSZ, &win) == 0) &&
-      win.ws_row > 0 && win.ws_col > 0)
-    {
-#if defined (aixpc)
-      shell_tty_info.c_winsize = win;	/* structure copying */
-#endif
-      sh_set_lines_and_columns (win.ws_row, win.ws_col);
-#if defined (READLINE)
-      rl_set_screen_size (win.ws_row, win.ws_col);
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-static sighandler
-sigwinch_sighandler (sig)
-     int sig;
-{
-#if defined (MUST_REINSTALL_SIGHANDLERS)
-  set_signal_handler (SIGWINCH, sigwinch_sighandler);
-#endif /* MUST_REINSTALL_SIGHANDLERS */
-  get_new_window_size (1);
-  SIGRETURN (0);
-}
-#else
-static void
-get_new_window_size (from_sig)
-     int from_sig;
-{
-}
-#endif /* TIOCGWINSZ && SIGWINCH */
-
-void
-set_sigwinch_handler ()
-{
-#if defined (TIOCGWINSZ) && defined (SIGWINCH)
- old_winch = set_signal_handler (SIGWINCH, sigwinch_sighandler);
-#endif
-}
-
-void
-unset_sigwinch_handler ()
-{
-#if defined (TIOCGWINSZ) && defined (SIGWINCH)
-  set_signal_handler (SIGWINCH, old_winch);
-#endif
-}
-
 /* Setup this shell to handle C-C, etc. */
 void
 initialize_job_signals ()
@@ -3557,7 +3535,6 @@ initialize_job_signals ()
       set_signal_handler (SIGTSTP, SIG_IGN);
       set_signal_handler (SIGTTOU, SIG_IGN);
       set_signal_handler (SIGTTIN, SIG_IGN);
-      set_sigwinch_handler ();
     }
   else if (job_control)
     {
diff --git a/lib/readline/ansi_stdlib.h b/lib/readline/ansi_stdlib.h
index 0bfba502..db13cd23 120000..100644
--- a/lib/readline/ansi_stdlib.h
+++ b/lib/readline/ansi_stdlib.h
@@ -1 +1,54 @@
-../../include/ansi_stdlib.h
\ No newline at end of file
+/* ansi_stdlib.h -- An ANSI Standard stdlib.h. */
+/* A minimal stdlib.h containing extern declarations for those functions
+   that bash uses. */
+
+/* Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
+
+   Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+   the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+   Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
+   version.
+
+   Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+   WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+   FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License
+   for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+   with Bash; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free Software
+   Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
+
+#if !defined (_STDLIB_H_)
+#define	_STDLIB_H_ 1
+
+/* String conversion functions. */
+extern int atoi ();
+
+extern double atof ();
+extern double strtod ();
+
+/* Memory allocation functions. */
+/* Generic pointer type. */
+#ifndef PTR_T
+
+#if defined (__STDC__)
+#  define PTR_T	void *
+#else
+#  define PTR_T char *
+#endif
+
+#endif /* PTR_T */
+
+extern PTR_T malloc ();
+extern PTR_T realloc ();
+extern void free ();
+
+/* Other miscellaneous functions. */
+extern void abort ();
+extern void exit ();
+extern char *getenv ();
+extern void qsort ();
+
+#endif /* _STDLIB_H  */
diff --git a/lib/readline/ddd b/lib/readline/ddd
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..942cce03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/readline/ddd
@@ -0,0 +1,438 @@
+*** ../../../bash-3.0-patched/lib/readline/display.c	2004-09-08 11:07:51.000000000 -0400
+--- display.c	2005-11-06 21:32:59.000000000 -0500
+***************
+*** 1,5 ****
+  /* display.c -- readline redisplay facility. */
+  
+! /* Copyright (C) 1987-2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+  
+     This file is part of the GNU Readline Library, a library for
+--- 1,5 ----
+  /* display.c -- readline redisplay facility. */
+  
+! /* Copyright (C) 1987-2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+  
+     This file is part of the GNU Readline Library, a library for
+***************
+*** 119,122 ****
+--- 119,123 ----
+  
+  int _rl_suppress_redisplay = 0;
++ int _rl_want_redisplay = 0;
+  
+  /* The stuff that gets printed out before the actual text of the line.
+***************
+*** 125,129 ****
+--- 126,135 ----
+  
+  /* Pseudo-global variables declared here. */
++ 
+  /* The visible cursor position.  If you print some text, adjust this. */
++ /* NOTE: _rl_last_c_pos is used as a buffer index when not in a locale
++    supporting multibyte characters, and an absolute cursor position when
++    in such a locale.  This is an artifact of the donated multibyte support.
++    Care must be taken when modifying its value. */
+  int _rl_last_c_pos = 0;
+  int _rl_last_v_pos = 0;
+***************
+*** 181,184 ****
+--- 187,202 ----
+  static int prompt_physical_chars;
+  
++ /* Variables to save and restore prompt and display information. */
++ 
++ /* These are getting numerous enough that it's time to create a struct. */
++ 
++ static char *saved_local_prompt;
++ static char *saved_local_prefix;
++ static int saved_last_invisible;
++ static int saved_visible_length;
++ static int saved_prefix_length;
++ static int saved_invis_chars_first_line;
++ static int saved_physical_chars;
++ 
+  /* Expand the prompt string S and return the number of visible
+     characters in *LP, if LP is not null.  This is currently more-or-less
+***************
+*** 237,241 ****
+  	{
+  	  ignoring = 0;
+! 	  last = r - ret - 1;
+  	  continue;
+  	}
+--- 255,260 ----
+  	{
+  	  ignoring = 0;
+! 	  if (p[-1] != RL_PROMPT_START_IGNORE)
+! 	    last = r - ret - 1;
+  	  continue;
+  	}
+***************
+*** 336,340 ****
+  
+    local_prompt = local_prompt_prefix = (char *)0;
+!   prompt_last_invisible = prompt_visible_length = 0;
+  
+    if (prompt == 0 || *prompt == 0)
+--- 355,360 ----
+  
+    local_prompt = local_prompt_prefix = (char *)0;
+!   prompt_last_invisible = prompt_invis_chars_first_line = 0;
+!   prompt_visible_length = prompt_physical_chars = 0;
+  
+    if (prompt == 0 || *prompt == 0)
+***************
+*** 441,445 ****
+      rl_display_prompt = "";
+  
+!   if (invisible_line == 0)
+      {
+        init_line_structures (0);
+--- 461,465 ----
+      rl_display_prompt = "";
+  
+!   if (invisible_line == 0 || vis_lbreaks == 0)
+      {
+        init_line_structures (0);
+***************
+*** 834,838 ****
+    if (_rl_horizontal_scroll_mode == 0 && _rl_term_up && *_rl_term_up)
+      {
+!       int nleft, pos, changed_screen_line;
+  
+        if (!rl_display_fixed || forced_display)
+--- 854,858 ----
+    if (_rl_horizontal_scroll_mode == 0 && _rl_term_up && *_rl_term_up)
+      {
+!       int nleft, pos, changed_screen_line, tx, fudge;
+  
+        if (!rl_display_fixed || forced_display)
+***************
+*** 879,883 ****
+  		  (_rl_last_c_pos < visible_first_line_len))
+  		{
+! 		  nleft = _rl_screenwidth + wrap_offset - _rl_last_c_pos;
+  		  if (nleft)
+  		    _rl_clear_to_eol (nleft);
+--- 899,906 ----
+  		  (_rl_last_c_pos < visible_first_line_len))
+  		{
+! 		  if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0)
+! 		    nleft = _rl_screenwidth - _rl_last_c_pos;
+! 		  else
+! 		    nleft = _rl_screenwidth + wrap_offset - _rl_last_c_pos;
+  		  if (nleft)
+  		    _rl_clear_to_eol (nleft);
+***************
+*** 915,919 ****
+  		 but the buffer position needs to be adjusted to account
+  		 for invisible characters. */
+! 	      if (cursor_linenum == 0 && wrap_offset)
+  		_rl_last_c_pos += wrap_offset;
+  	    }
+--- 938,942 ----
+  		 but the buffer position needs to be adjusted to account
+  		 for invisible characters. */
+! 	      if ((MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented) && cursor_linenum == 0 && wrap_offset)
+  		_rl_last_c_pos += wrap_offset;
+  	    }
+***************
+*** 948,951 ****
+--- 971,980 ----
+  	  nleft = c_pos - pos;
+  
++ 	  /* NLEFT is now a number of characters in a buffer.  When in a
++ 	     multibyte locale, however, _rl_last_c_pos is an absolute cursor
++ 	     position that doesn't take invisible characters in the prompt
++ 	     into account.  We use a fudge factor to compensate. */
++ 	  fudge = (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0) ? wrap_offset : 0;
++ 
+  	  /* Since _rl_backspace() doesn't know about invisible characters in the
+  	     prompt, and there's no good way to tell it, we compensate for
+***************
+*** 953,961 ****
+  	  if (wrap_offset && cursor_linenum == 0 && nleft < _rl_last_c_pos)
+  	    {
+- 	      _rl_backspace (_rl_last_c_pos - nleft);
+  	      if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0)
+! 		_rl_last_c_pos = _rl_col_width (&visible_line[pos], 0, nleft);
+  	      else
+! 		_rl_last_c_pos = nleft;
+  	    }
+  
+--- 982,994 ----
+  	  if (wrap_offset && cursor_linenum == 0 && nleft < _rl_last_c_pos)
+  	    {
+  	      if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0)
+! 		tx = _rl_col_width (&visible_line[pos], 0, nleft);
+  	      else
+! 		tx = nleft;
+! 	      if ((_rl_last_c_pos+fudge) != tx)
+! 		{
+! 	          _rl_backspace (_rl_last_c_pos + fudge - tx);	/* XXX */
+! 	          _rl_last_c_pos = tx;
+! 		}
+  	    }
+  
+***************
+*** 1118,1122 ****
+       emulators.  In this calculation, TEMP is the physical screen
+       position of the cursor. */
+!   temp = _rl_last_c_pos - W_OFFSET(_rl_last_v_pos, visible_wrap_offset);
+    if (temp == _rl_screenwidth && _rl_term_autowrap && !_rl_horizontal_scroll_mode
+  	&& _rl_last_v_pos == current_line - 1)
+--- 1151,1158 ----
+       emulators.  In this calculation, TEMP is the physical screen
+       position of the cursor. */
+!   if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0)
+!     temp = _rl_last_c_pos;
+!   else
+!     temp = _rl_last_c_pos - W_OFFSET(_rl_last_v_pos, visible_wrap_offset);
+    if (temp == _rl_screenwidth && _rl_term_autowrap && !_rl_horizontal_scroll_mode
+  	&& _rl_last_v_pos == current_line - 1)
+***************
+*** 1324,1328 ****
+      {
+        _rl_move_vert (current_line);
+!       if (current_line == 0 && visible_wrap_offset)
+  	_rl_last_c_pos += visible_wrap_offset;
+      }
+--- 1360,1364 ----
+      {
+        _rl_move_vert (current_line);
+!       if ((MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented) && current_line == 0 && visible_wrap_offset)
+  	_rl_last_c_pos += visible_wrap_offset;
+      }
+***************
+*** 1415,1419 ****
+  	      _rl_last_c_pos += col_lendiff;
+  	    }
+! 	  else if (*ols == 0 && lendiff > 0)
+  	    {
+  	      /* At the end of a line the characters do not have to
+--- 1451,1455 ----
+  	      _rl_last_c_pos += col_lendiff;
+  	    }
+! 	  else if ((MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented != 0) && *ols == 0 && lendiff > 0)
+  	    {
+  	      /* At the end of a line the characters do not have to
+***************
+*** 1797,1803 ****
+    return ((ISPRINT (uc)) ? 1 : 2);
+  }
+- 
+  /* How to print things in the "echo-area".  The prompt is treated as a
+     mini-modeline. */
+  
+  #if defined (USE_VARARGS)
+--- 1833,1839 ----
+    return ((ISPRINT (uc)) ? 1 : 2);
+  }
+  /* How to print things in the "echo-area".  The prompt is treated as a
+     mini-modeline. */
++ static int msg_saved_prompt = 0;
+  
+  #if defined (USE_VARARGS)
+***************
+*** 1830,1835 ****
+--- 1866,1882 ----
+    va_end (args);
+  
++   if (saved_local_prompt == 0)
++     {
++       rl_save_prompt ();
++       msg_saved_prompt = 1;
++     }
+    rl_display_prompt = msg_buf;
++   local_prompt = expand_prompt (msg_buf, &prompt_visible_length,
++ 					 &prompt_last_invisible,
++ 					 &prompt_invis_chars_first_line,
++ 					 &prompt_physical_chars);
++   local_prompt_prefix = (char *)NULL;
+    (*rl_redisplay_function) ();
++ 
+    return 0;
+  }
+***************
+*** 1841,1846 ****
+--- 1888,1905 ----
+    sprintf (msg_buf, format, arg1, arg2);
+    msg_buf[sizeof(msg_buf) - 1] = '\0';	/* overflow? */
++ 
+    rl_display_prompt = msg_buf;
++   if (saved_local_prompt == 0)
++     {
++       rl_save_prompt ();
++       msg_saved_prompt = 1;
++     }
++   local_prompt = expand_prompt (msg_buf, &prompt_visible_length,
++ 					 &prompt_last_invisible,
++ 					 &prompt_invis_chars_first_line,
++ 					 &prompt_physical_chars);
++   local_prompt_prefix = (char *)NULL;
+    (*rl_redisplay_function) ();
++       
+    return 0;
+  }
+***************
+*** 1852,1855 ****
+--- 1911,1919 ----
+  {
+    rl_display_prompt = rl_prompt;
++   if (msg_saved_prompt)
++     {
++       rl_restore_prompt ();
++       msg_saved_prompt = 0;
++     }
+    (*rl_redisplay_function) ();
+    return 0;
+***************
+*** 1866,1878 ****
+  }
+  
+- /* These are getting numerous enough that it's time to create a struct. */
+- 
+- static char *saved_local_prompt;
+- static char *saved_local_prefix;
+- static int saved_last_invisible;
+- static int saved_visible_length;
+- static int saved_invis_chars_first_line;
+- static int saved_physical_chars;
+- 
+  void
+  rl_save_prompt ()
+--- 1930,1933 ----
+***************
+*** 1880,1883 ****
+--- 1935,1939 ----
+    saved_local_prompt = local_prompt;
+    saved_local_prefix = local_prompt_prefix;
++   saved_prefix_length = prompt_prefix_length;
+    saved_last_invisible = prompt_last_invisible;
+    saved_visible_length = prompt_visible_length;
+***************
+*** 1886,1890 ****
+  
+    local_prompt = local_prompt_prefix = (char *)0;
+!   prompt_last_invisible = prompt_visible_length = 0;
+    prompt_invis_chars_first_line = prompt_physical_chars = 0;
+  }
+--- 1942,1946 ----
+  
+    local_prompt = local_prompt_prefix = (char *)0;
+!   prompt_last_invisible = prompt_visible_length = prompt_prefix_length = 0;
+    prompt_invis_chars_first_line = prompt_physical_chars = 0;
+  }
+***************
+*** 1898,1905 ****
+--- 1954,1967 ----
+    local_prompt = saved_local_prompt;
+    local_prompt_prefix = saved_local_prefix;
++   prompt_prefix_length = saved_prefix_length;
+    prompt_last_invisible = saved_last_invisible;
+    prompt_visible_length = saved_visible_length;
+    prompt_invis_chars_first_line = saved_invis_chars_first_line;
+    prompt_physical_chars = saved_physical_chars;
++ 
++   /* can test saved_local_prompt to see if prompt info has been saved. */
++   saved_local_prompt = saved_local_prefix = (char *)0;
++   saved_last_invisible = saved_visible_length = saved_prefix_length = 0;
++   saved_invis_chars_first_line = saved_physical_chars = 0;
+  }
+  
+***************
+*** 1935,1938 ****
+--- 1997,2002 ----
+      }
+  
++   prompt_physical_chars = saved_physical_chars + 1;
++ 
+    return pmt;
+  }
+***************
+*** 1995,1998 ****
+--- 2059,2065 ----
+       int count, col;
+  {
++ #if defined (__MSDOS__) || defined (__MINGW32__)
++   _rl_output_some_chars (string, count);
++ #else
+    /* DEBUGGING */
+    if (MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented)
+***************
+*** 2033,2036 ****
+--- 2100,2104 ----
+  	tputs (_rl_term_ei, 1, _rl_output_character_function);
+      }
++ #endif /* __MSDOS__ || __MINGW32__ */
+  }
+  
+***************
+*** 2043,2046 ****
+--- 2111,2115 ----
+      return;
+  
++ #if !defined (__MSDOS__) && !defined (__MINGW32__)
+    if (_rl_term_DC && *_rl_term_DC)
+      {
+***************
+*** 2055,2058 ****
+--- 2124,2128 ----
+  	  tputs (_rl_term_dc, 1, _rl_output_character_function);
+      }
++ #endif /* !__MSDOS__ && !__MINGW32__ */
+  }
+  
+***************
+*** 2110,2125 ****
+       char *t;
+  {
+!   char *oldp, *oldl, *oldlprefix;
+!   int oldlen, oldlast, oldplen, oldninvis, oldphyschars;
+  
+-   /* Geez, I should make this a struct. */
+    oldp = rl_display_prompt;
+!   oldl = local_prompt;
+!   oldlprefix = local_prompt_prefix;
+!   oldlen = prompt_visible_length;
+!   oldplen = prompt_prefix_length;
+!   oldlast = prompt_last_invisible;
+!   oldninvis = prompt_invis_chars_first_line;
+!   oldphyschars = prompt_physical_chars;
+  
+    rl_display_prompt = t;
+--- 2180,2187 ----
+       char *t;
+  {
+!   char *oldp;
+  
+    oldp = rl_display_prompt;
+!   rl_save_prompt ();
+  
+    rl_display_prompt = t;
+***************
+*** 2129,2142 ****
+  				   &prompt_physical_chars);
+    local_prompt_prefix = (char *)NULL;
+    rl_forced_update_display ();
+  
+    rl_display_prompt = oldp;
+!   local_prompt = oldl;
+!   local_prompt_prefix = oldlprefix;
+!   prompt_visible_length = oldlen;
+!   prompt_prefix_length = oldplen;
+!   prompt_last_invisible = oldlast;
+!   prompt_invis_chars_first_line = oldninvis;
+!   prompt_physical_chars = oldphyschars;
+  }
+        
+--- 2191,2199 ----
+  				   &prompt_physical_chars);
+    local_prompt_prefix = (char *)NULL;
++ 
+    rl_forced_update_display ();
+  
+    rl_display_prompt = oldp;
+!   rl_restore_prompt();
+  }
+        
diff --git a/lib/readline/display.c b/lib/readline/display.c
index 01e062cf..18a176f5 100644
--- a/lib/readline/display.c
+++ b/lib/readline/display.c
@@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ rl_redisplay ()
 
   if (_rl_horizontal_scroll_mode == 0 && _rl_term_up && *_rl_term_up)
     {
-      int nleft, pos, changed_screen_line, tx;
+      int nleft, pos, changed_screen_line, tx, fudge;
 
       if (!rl_display_fixed || forced_display)
 	{
@@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ rl_redisplay ()
 		 the physical cursor position on the screen stays the same,
 		 but the buffer position needs to be adjusted to account
 		 for invisible characters. */
-	      if ((MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented) &&  cursor_linenum == 0 && wrap_offset)
+	      if ((MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented) && cursor_linenum == 0 && wrap_offset)
 		_rl_last_c_pos += wrap_offset;
 	    }
 
@@ -970,6 +970,12 @@ rl_redisplay ()
 	     start of the line and the cursor position. */
 	  nleft = c_pos - pos;
 
+	  /* NLEFT is now a number of characters in a buffer.  When in a
+	     multibyte locale, however, _rl_last_c_pos is an absolute cursor
+	     position that doesn't take invisible characters in the prompt
+	     into account.  We use a fudge factor to compensate. */
+	  fudge = (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0) ? wrap_offset : 0;
+
 	  /* Since _rl_backspace() doesn't know about invisible characters in the
 	     prompt, and there's no good way to tell it, we compensate for
 	     those characters here and call _rl_backspace() directly. */
@@ -979,9 +985,9 @@ rl_redisplay ()
 		tx = _rl_col_width (&visible_line[pos], 0, nleft);
 	      else
 		tx = nleft;
-	      if (_rl_last_c_pos != tx)
+	      if ((_rl_last_c_pos+fudge) != tx)
 		{
-	          _rl_backspace (_rl_last_c_pos - tx);	/* XXX */
+	          _rl_backspace (_rl_last_c_pos + fudge - tx);	/* XXX */
 	          _rl_last_c_pos = tx;
 		}
 	    }
diff --git a/lib/readline/display.c~ b/lib/readline/display.c~
index 959cc564..2a806cae 100644
--- a/lib/readline/display.c~
+++ b/lib/readline/display.c~
@@ -424,7 +424,6 @@ init_line_structures (minsize)
       invisible_line[n] = 1;
     }
 
-kill(getpid(), SIGWINCH);
   if (vis_lbreaks == 0)
     {
       /* should be enough. */
@@ -445,7 +444,7 @@ rl_redisplay ()
   register int in, out, c, linenum, cursor_linenum;
   register char *line;
   int c_pos, inv_botlin, lb_botlin, lb_linenum;
-  int newlines, lpos, temp, modmark, n0, num;
+  int newlines, lpos, temp, modmark, n0, num, fudge;
   char *prompt_this_line;
 #if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
   wchar_t wc;
@@ -938,7 +937,7 @@ rl_redisplay ()
 		 the physical cursor position on the screen stays the same,
 		 but the buffer position needs to be adjusted to account
 		 for invisible characters. */
-	      if ((MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented) &&  cursor_linenum == 0 && wrap_offset)
+	      if ((MB_CUR_MAX == 1 || rl_byte_oriented) && cursor_linenum == 0 && wrap_offset)
 		_rl_last_c_pos += wrap_offset;
 	    }
 
@@ -971,6 +970,12 @@ rl_redisplay ()
 	     start of the line and the cursor position. */
 	  nleft = c_pos - pos;
 
+	  /* NLEFT is now a number of characters in a buffer.  When in a
+	     multibyte locale, however, _rl_last_c_pos is an absolute cursor
+	     position that doesn't take invisible characters in the prompt
+	     into account.  We use a fudge factor to compensate. */
+	  fudge = (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && rl_byte_oriented == 0) ? wrap_offset : 0;
+
 	  /* Since _rl_backspace() doesn't know about invisible characters in the
 	     prompt, and there's no good way to tell it, we compensate for
 	     those characters here and call _rl_backspace() directly. */
@@ -980,9 +985,9 @@ rl_redisplay ()
 		tx = _rl_col_width (&visible_line[pos], 0, nleft);
 	      else
 		tx = nleft;
-	      if (_rl_last_c_pos != tx)
+	      if ((_rl_last_c_pos+fudge) != tx)
 		{
-	          _rl_backspace (_rl_last_c_pos - tx);	/* XXX */
+	          _rl_backspace (_rl_last_c_pos + fudge - tx);	/* XXX */
 	          _rl_last_c_pos = tx;
 		}
 	    }
diff --git a/lib/readline/doc/fdl.texi b/lib/readline/doc/fdl.texi
index 68e5eb54..47ead9f0 120000..100644
--- a/lib/readline/doc/fdl.texi
+++ b/lib/readline/doc/fdl.texi
@@ -1 +1,452 @@
-../../../doc/fdl.texi
\ No newline at end of file
+
+@node GNU Free Documentation License
+@appendixsec GNU Free Documentation License
+
+@cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
+@center Version 1.2, November 2002
+
+@display
+Copyright @copyright{} 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+@end display
+
+@enumerate 0
+@item
+PREAMBLE
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document @dfn{free} in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.  It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does.  But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book.  We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+@item
+APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein.  The ``Document'', below,
+refers to any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as ``you''.  You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A ``Modified Version'' of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A ``Secondary Section'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall
+directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document is in
+part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain
+any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The ``Invariant Sections'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License.  If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The ``Cover Texts'' are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License.  A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A ``Transparent'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text.  A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``Opaque''.
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+@sc{ascii} without markup, Texinfo input format, La@TeX{} input
+format, @acronym{SGML} or @acronym{XML} using a publicly available
+@acronym{DTD}, and standard-conforming simple @acronym{HTML},
+PostScript or @acronym{PDF} designed for human modification.  Examples
+of transparent image formats include @acronym{PNG}, @acronym{XCF} and
+@acronym{JPG}.  Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be
+read and edited only by proprietary word processors, @acronym{SGML} or
+@acronym{XML} for which the @acronym{DTD} and/or processing tools are
+not generally available, and the machine-generated @acronym{HTML},
+PostScript or @acronym{PDF} produced by some word processors for
+output purposes only.
+
+The ``Title Page'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page.  For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+A section ``Entitled XYZ'' means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as ``Acknowledgements'',
+``Dedications'', ``Endorsements'', or ``History''.)  To ``Preserve the Title''
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document.  These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+@item
+VERBATIM COPYING
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
+conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies.  If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+@item
+COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies.  The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible.  You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
+them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
+
+@item
+MODIFICATIONS
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it.  In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+@enumerate A
+@item
+Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+(which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+of the Document).  You may use the same title as a previous version
+if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+
+@item
+List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+unless they release you from this requirement.
+
+@item
+State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+Modified Version, as the publisher.
+
+@item
+Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+
+@item
+Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+
+@item
+Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+
+@item
+Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+
+@item
+Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+
+@item
+Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add
+to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.  If
+there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one
+stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+
+@item
+Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+it was based on.  These may be placed in the ``History'' section.
+You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+
+@item
+For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', Preserve
+the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the
+substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or
+dedications given therein.
+
+@item
+Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
+or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+
+@item
+Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''.  Such a section
+may not be included in the Modified Version.
+
+@item
+Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' or
+to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+
+@item
+Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+@end enumerate
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+@item
+COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History''
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''.  You must delete all
+sections Entitled ``Endorsements.''
+
+@item
+COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
+released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
+License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
+the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
+verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
+it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
+License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
+other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
+
+@item
+AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
+the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+@item
+TRANSLATION
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
+its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
+title.
+
+@item
+TERMINATION
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
+as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other attempt to
+copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
+automatically terminate your rights under this License.  However,
+parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+@item
+FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
+of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
+@uref{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/}.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation.  If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
+@end enumerate
+
+@page
+@appendixsubsec ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+  Copyright (C)  @var{year}  @var{your name}.
+  Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+  under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+  or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+  with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
+  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
+  Free Documentation License''.
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the ``with...Texts.'' line with this:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+    with the Invariant Sections being @var{list their titles}, with
+    the Front-Cover Texts being @var{list}, and with the Back-Cover Texts
+    being @var{list}.
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
+
+@c Local Variables:
+@c ispell-local-pdict: "ispell-dict"
+@c End:
+
diff --git a/lib/readline/posixdir.h b/lib/readline/posixdir.h
index 8b163845..91f6d961 120000..100644
--- a/lib/readline/posixdir.h
+++ b/lib/readline/posixdir.h
@@ -1 +1,61 @@
-../../include/posixdir.h
\ No newline at end of file
+/* posixdir.h -- Posix directory reading includes and defines. */
+
+/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
+
+   Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+   under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+   any later version.
+
+   Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+   ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+   License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with Bash; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free
+   Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
+
+/* This file should be included instead of <dirent.h> or <sys/dir.h>. */
+
+#if !defined (_POSIXDIR_H_)
+#define _POSIXDIR_H_
+
+#if defined (HAVE_DIRENT_H)
+#  include <dirent.h>
+#  if defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_NAMLEN)
+#    define D_NAMLEN(d)	((d)->d_namlen)
+#  else
+#    define D_NAMLEN(d)   (strlen ((d)->d_name))
+#  endif /* !HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_NAMLEN */
+#else
+#  if defined (HAVE_SYS_NDIR_H)
+#    include <sys/ndir.h>
+#  endif
+#  if defined (HAVE_SYS_DIR_H)
+#    include <sys/dir.h>
+#  endif
+#  if defined (HAVE_NDIR_H)
+#    include <ndir.h>
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (dirent)
+#    define dirent direct
+#  endif /* !dirent */
+#  define D_NAMLEN(d)   ((d)->d_namlen)
+#endif /* !HAVE_DIRENT_H */
+
+#if defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_INO) && !defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_FILENO)
+#  define d_fileno d_ino
+#endif
+
+#if defined (_POSIX_SOURCE) && (!defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_INO) || defined (BROKEN_DIRENT_D_INO))
+/* Posix does not require that the d_ino field be present, and some
+   systems do not provide it. */
+#  define REAL_DIR_ENTRY(dp) 1
+#else
+#  define REAL_DIR_ENTRY(dp) (dp->d_ino != 0)
+#endif /* _POSIX_SOURCE */
+
+#endif /* !_POSIXDIR_H_ */
diff --git a/lib/readline/posixjmp.h b/lib/readline/posixjmp.h
index b4d3ee74..b52aa003 120000..100644
--- a/lib/readline/posixjmp.h
+++ b/lib/readline/posixjmp.h
@@ -1 +1,40 @@
-../../include/posixjmp.h
\ No newline at end of file
+/* posixjmp.h -- wrapper for setjmp.h with changes for POSIX systems. */
+
+/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
+
+   Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+   under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+   any later version.
+
+   Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+   ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+   License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with Bash; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free
+   Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
+
+#ifndef _POSIXJMP_H_
+#define _POSIXJMP_H_
+
+#include <setjmp.h>
+
+/* This *must* be included *after* config.h */
+
+#if defined (HAVE_POSIX_SIGSETJMP)
+#  define procenv_t	sigjmp_buf
+#  if !defined (__OPENNT)
+#    undef setjmp
+#    define setjmp(x)	sigsetjmp((x), 1)
+#    undef longjmp
+#    define longjmp(x, n)	siglongjmp((x), (n))
+#  endif /* !__OPENNT */
+#else
+#  define procenv_t	jmp_buf
+#endif
+
+#endif /* _POSIXJMP_H_ */
diff --git a/lib/readline/posixstat.h b/lib/readline/posixstat.h
index c6164b79..c93b5288 120000..100644
--- a/lib/readline/posixstat.h
+++ b/lib/readline/posixstat.h
@@ -1 +1,142 @@
-../../include/posixstat.h
\ No newline at end of file
+/* posixstat.h -- Posix stat(2) definitions for systems that
+   don't have them. */
+
+/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
+
+   Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+   under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+   any later version.
+
+   Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+   ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+   or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+   License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with Bash; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free
+   Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
+
+/* This file should be included instead of <sys/stat.h>.
+   It relies on the local sys/stat.h to work though. */
+#if !defined (_POSIXSTAT_H_)
+#define _POSIXSTAT_H_
+
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+#if defined (STAT_MACROS_BROKEN)
+#  undef S_ISBLK
+#  undef S_ISCHR
+#  undef S_ISDIR
+#  undef S_ISFIFO
+#  undef S_ISREG
+#  undef S_ISLNK
+#endif /* STAT_MACROS_BROKEN */
+
+/* These are guaranteed to work only on isc386 */
+#if !defined (S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_ISDIR)
+#  define S_IFDIR 0040000
+#endif /* !S_IFDIR && !S_ISDIR */
+#if !defined (S_IFMT)
+#  define S_IFMT  0170000
+#endif /* !S_IFMT */
+
+/* Posix 1003.1 5.6.1.1 <sys/stat.h> file types */
+
+/* Some Posix-wannabe systems define _S_IF* macros instead of S_IF*, but
+   do not provide the S_IS* macros that Posix requires. */
+
+#if defined (_S_IFMT) && !defined (S_IFMT)
+#define S_IFMT _S_IFMT
+#endif
+#if defined (_S_IFIFO) && !defined (S_IFIFO)
+#define S_IFIFO _S_IFIFO
+#endif
+#if defined (_S_IFCHR) && !defined (S_IFCHR)
+#define S_IFCHR _S_IFCHR
+#endif
+#if defined (_S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_IFDIR)
+#define S_IFDIR _S_IFDIR
+#endif
+#if defined (_S_IFBLK) && !defined (S_IFBLK)
+#define S_IFBLK _S_IFBLK
+#endif
+#if defined (_S_IFREG) && !defined (S_IFREG)
+#define S_IFREG _S_IFREG
+#endif
+#if defined (_S_IFLNK) && !defined (S_IFLNK)
+#define S_IFLNK _S_IFLNK
+#endif
+#if defined (_S_IFSOCK) && !defined (S_IFSOCK)
+#define S_IFSOCK _S_IFSOCK
+#endif
+
+/* Test for each symbol individually and define the ones necessary (some
+   systems claiming Posix compatibility define some but not all). */
+
+#if defined (S_IFBLK) && !defined (S_ISBLK)
+#define	S_ISBLK(m)	(((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFBLK)	/* block device */
+#endif
+
+#if defined (S_IFCHR) && !defined (S_ISCHR)
+#define	S_ISCHR(m)	(((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFCHR)	/* character device */
+#endif
+
+#if defined (S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_ISDIR)
+#define	S_ISDIR(m)	(((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFDIR)	/* directory */
+#endif
+
+#if defined (S_IFREG) && !defined (S_ISREG)
+#define	S_ISREG(m)	(((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFREG)	/* file */
+#endif
+
+#if defined (S_IFIFO) && !defined (S_ISFIFO)
+#define	S_ISFIFO(m)	(((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFIFO)	/* fifo - named pipe */
+#endif
+
+#if defined (S_IFLNK) && !defined (S_ISLNK)
+#define	S_ISLNK(m)	(((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFLNK)	/* symbolic link */
+#endif
+
+#if defined (S_IFSOCK) && !defined (S_ISSOCK)
+#define	S_ISSOCK(m)	(((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFSOCK)	/* socket */
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * POSIX 1003.1 5.6.1.2 <sys/stat.h> File Modes
+ */
+
+#if !defined (S_IRWXU)
+#  if !defined (S_IREAD)
+#    define S_IREAD	00400
+#    define S_IWRITE	00200
+#    define S_IEXEC	00100
+#  endif /* S_IREAD */
+
+#  if !defined (S_IRUSR)
+#    define S_IRUSR	S_IREAD			/* read, owner */
+#    define S_IWUSR	S_IWRITE		/* write, owner */
+#    define S_IXUSR	S_IEXEC			/* execute, owner */
+
+#    define S_IRGRP	(S_IREAD  >> 3)		/* read, group */
+#    define S_IWGRP	(S_IWRITE >> 3)		/* write, group */
+#    define S_IXGRP	(S_IEXEC  >> 3)		/* execute, group */
+
+#    define S_IROTH	(S_IREAD  >> 6)		/* read, other */
+#    define S_IWOTH	(S_IWRITE >> 6)		/* write, other */
+#    define S_IXOTH	(S_IEXEC  >> 6)		/* execute, other */
+#  endif /* !S_IRUSR */
+
+#  define S_IRWXU	(S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IXUSR)
+#  define S_IRWXG	(S_IRGRP | S_IWGRP | S_IXGRP)
+#  define S_IRWXO	(S_IROTH | S_IWOTH | S_IXOTH)
+#endif /* !S_IRWXU */
+
+/* These are non-standard, but are used in builtins.c$symbolic_umask() */
+#define S_IRUGO		(S_IRUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH)
+#define S_IWUGO		(S_IWUSR | S_IWGRP | S_IWOTH)
+#define S_IXUGO		(S_IXUSR | S_IXGRP | S_IXOTH)
+
+#endif /* _POSIXSTAT_H_ */
diff --git a/lib/readline/tilde.c b/lib/readline/tilde.c
index 439ceede..d757f7a9 120000..100644
--- a/lib/readline/tilde.c
+++ b/lib/readline/tilde.c
@@ -1 +1,502 @@
-../tilde/tilde.c
\ No newline at end of file
+/* tilde.c -- Tilde expansion code (~/foo := $HOME/foo). */
+
+/* Copyright (C) 1988,1989 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   This file is part of GNU Readline, a library for reading lines
+   of text with interactive input and history editing.
+
+   Readline is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+   under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
+   Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any
+   later version.
+
+   Readline is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+   WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+   General Public License for more details.
+
+   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+   along with Readline; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to the Free
+   Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
+
+#if defined (HAVE_CONFIG_H)
+#  include <config.h>
+#endif
+
+#if defined (HAVE_UNISTD_H)
+#  ifdef _MINIX
+#    include <sys/types.h>
+#  endif
+#  include <unistd.h>
+#endif
+
+#if defined (HAVE_STRING_H)
+#  include <string.h>
+#else /* !HAVE_STRING_H */
+#  include <strings.h>
+#endif /* !HAVE_STRING_H */  
+
+#if defined (HAVE_STDLIB_H)
+#  include <stdlib.h>
+#else
+#  include "ansi_stdlib.h"
+#endif /* HAVE_STDLIB_H */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#if defined (HAVE_PWD_H)
+#include <pwd.h>
+#endif
+
+#include "tilde.h"
+
+#if defined (TEST) || defined (STATIC_MALLOC)
+static void *xmalloc (), *xrealloc ();
+#else
+#  include "xmalloc.h"
+#endif /* TEST || STATIC_MALLOC */
+
+#if !defined (HAVE_GETPW_DECLS)
+#  if defined (HAVE_GETPWUID)
+extern struct passwd *getpwuid PARAMS((uid_t));
+#  endif
+#  if defined (HAVE_GETPWNAM)
+extern struct passwd *getpwnam PARAMS((const char *));
+#  endif
+#endif /* !HAVE_GETPW_DECLS */
+
+#if !defined (savestring)
+#define savestring(x) strcpy ((char *)xmalloc (1 + strlen (x)), (x))
+#endif /* !savestring */
+
+#if !defined (NULL)
+#  if defined (__STDC__)
+#    define NULL ((void *) 0)
+#  else
+#    define NULL 0x0
+#  endif /* !__STDC__ */
+#endif /* !NULL */
+
+/* If being compiled as part of bash, these will be satisfied from
+   variables.o.  If being compiled as part of readline, they will
+   be satisfied from shell.o. */
+extern char *sh_get_home_dir PARAMS((void));
+extern char *sh_get_env_value PARAMS((const char *));
+
+/* The default value of tilde_additional_prefixes.  This is set to
+   whitespace preceding a tilde so that simple programs which do not
+   perform any word separation get desired behaviour. */
+static const char *default_prefixes[] =
+  { " ~", "\t~", (const char *)NULL };
+
+/* The default value of tilde_additional_suffixes.  This is set to
+   whitespace or newline so that simple programs which do not
+   perform any word separation get desired behaviour. */
+static const char *default_suffixes[] =
+  { " ", "\n", (const char *)NULL };
+
+/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function that the application
+   wants called before trying the standard tilde expansions.  The function
+   is called with the text sans tilde, and returns a malloc()'ed string
+   which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if the expansion fails. */
+tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook = (tilde_hook_func_t *)NULL;
+
+/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function to call if the
+   standard meaning for expanding a tilde fails.  The function is called
+   with the text (sans tilde, as in "foo"), and returns a malloc()'ed string
+   which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if there is no expansion. */
+tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_failure_hook = (tilde_hook_func_t *)NULL;
+
+/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which
+   are duplicates for a tilde prefix.  Bash uses this to expand
+   `=~' and `:~'. */
+char **tilde_additional_prefixes = (char **)default_prefixes;
+
+/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which match
+   the end of a username, instead of just "/".  Bash sets this to
+   `:' and `=~'. */
+char **tilde_additional_suffixes = (char **)default_suffixes;
+
+static int tilde_find_prefix PARAMS((const char *, int *));
+static int tilde_find_suffix PARAMS((const char *));
+static char *isolate_tilde_prefix PARAMS((const char *, int *));
+static char *glue_prefix_and_suffix PARAMS((char *, const char *, int));
+
+/* Find the start of a tilde expansion in STRING, and return the index of
+   the tilde which starts the expansion.  Place the length of the text
+   which identified this tilde starter in LEN, excluding the tilde itself. */
+static int
+tilde_find_prefix (string, len)
+     const char *string;
+     int *len;
+{
+  register int i, j, string_len;
+  register char **prefixes;
+
+  prefixes = tilde_additional_prefixes;
+
+  string_len = strlen (string);
+  *len = 0;
+
+  if (*string == '\0' || *string == '~')
+    return (0);
+
+  if (prefixes)
+    {
+      for (i = 0; i < string_len; i++)
+	{
+	  for (j = 0; prefixes[j]; j++)
+	    {
+	      if (strncmp (string + i, prefixes[j], strlen (prefixes[j])) == 0)
+		{
+		  *len = strlen (prefixes[j]) - 1;
+		  return (i + *len);
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+  return (string_len);
+}
+
+/* Find the end of a tilde expansion in STRING, and return the index of
+   the character which ends the tilde definition.  */
+static int
+tilde_find_suffix (string)
+     const char *string;
+{
+  register int i, j, string_len;
+  register char **suffixes;
+
+  suffixes = tilde_additional_suffixes;
+  string_len = strlen (string);
+
+  for (i = 0; i < string_len; i++)
+    {
+#if defined (__MSDOS__)
+      if (string[i] == '/' || string[i] == '\\' /* || !string[i] */)
+#else
+      if (string[i] == '/' /* || !string[i] */)
+#endif
+	break;
+
+      for (j = 0; suffixes && suffixes[j]; j++)
+	{
+	  if (strncmp (string + i, suffixes[j], strlen (suffixes[j])) == 0)
+	    return (i);
+	}
+    }
+  return (i);
+}
+
+/* Return a new string which is the result of tilde expanding STRING. */
+char *
+tilde_expand (string)
+     const char *string;
+{
+  char *result;
+  int result_size, result_index;
+
+  result_index = result_size = 0;
+  if (result = strchr (string, '~'))
+    result = (char *)xmalloc (result_size = (strlen (string) + 16));
+  else
+    result = (char *)xmalloc (result_size = (strlen (string) + 1));
+
+  /* Scan through STRING expanding tildes as we come to them. */
+  while (1)
+    {
+      register int start, end;
+      char *tilde_word, *expansion;
+      int len;
+
+      /* Make START point to the tilde which starts the expansion. */
+      start = tilde_find_prefix (string, &len);
+
+      /* Copy the skipped text into the result. */
+      if ((result_index + start + 1) > result_size)
+	result = (char *)xrealloc (result, 1 + (result_size += (start + 20)));
+
+      strncpy (result + result_index, string, start);
+      result_index += start;
+
+      /* Advance STRING to the starting tilde. */
+      string += start;
+
+      /* Make END be the index of one after the last character of the
+	 username. */
+      end = tilde_find_suffix (string);
+
+      /* If both START and END are zero, we are all done. */
+      if (!start && !end)
+	break;
+
+      /* Expand the entire tilde word, and copy it into RESULT. */
+      tilde_word = (char *)xmalloc (1 + end);
+      strncpy (tilde_word, string, end);
+      tilde_word[end] = '\0';
+      string += end;
+
+      expansion = tilde_expand_word (tilde_word);
+      free (tilde_word);
+
+      len = strlen (expansion);
+#ifdef __CYGWIN__
+      /* Fix for Cygwin to prevent ~user/xxx from expanding to //xxx when
+	 $HOME for `user' is /.  On cygwin, // denotes a network drive. */
+      if (len > 1 || *expansion != '/' || *string != '/')
+#endif
+	{
+	  if ((result_index + len + 1) > result_size)
+	    result = (char *)xrealloc (result, 1 + (result_size += (len + 20)));
+
+	  strcpy (result + result_index, expansion);
+	  result_index += len;
+	}
+      free (expansion);
+    }
+
+  result[result_index] = '\0';
+
+  return (result);
+}
+
+/* Take FNAME and return the tilde prefix we want expanded.  If LENP is
+   non-null, the index of the end of the prefix into FNAME is returned in
+   the location it points to. */
+static char *
+isolate_tilde_prefix (fname, lenp)
+     const char *fname;
+     int *lenp;
+{
+  char *ret;
+  int i;
+
+  ret = (char *)xmalloc (strlen (fname));
+#if defined (__MSDOS__)
+  for (i = 1; fname[i] && fname[i] != '/' && fname[i] != '\\'; i++)
+#else
+  for (i = 1; fname[i] && fname[i] != '/'; i++)
+#endif
+    ret[i - 1] = fname[i];
+  ret[i - 1] = '\0';
+  if (lenp)
+    *lenp = i;
+  return ret;
+}
+
+#if 0
+/* Public function to scan a string (FNAME) beginning with a tilde and find
+   the portion of the string that should be passed to the tilde expansion
+   function.  Right now, it just calls tilde_find_suffix and allocates new
+   memory, but it can be expanded to do different things later. */
+char *
+tilde_find_word (fname, flags, lenp)
+     const char *fname;
+     int flags, *lenp;
+{
+  int x;
+  char *r;
+
+  x = tilde_find_suffix (fname);
+  if (x == 0)
+    {
+      r = savestring (fname);
+      if (lenp)
+	*lenp = 0;
+    }
+  else
+    {
+      r = (char *)xmalloc (1 + x);
+      strncpy (r, fname, x);
+      r[x] = '\0';
+      if (lenp)
+	*lenp = x;
+    }
+
+  return r;
+}
+#endif
+
+/* Return a string that is PREFIX concatenated with SUFFIX starting at
+   SUFFIND. */
+static char *
+glue_prefix_and_suffix (prefix, suffix, suffind)
+     char *prefix;
+     const char *suffix;
+     int suffind;
+{
+  char *ret;
+  int plen, slen;
+
+  plen = (prefix && *prefix) ? strlen (prefix) : 0;
+  slen = strlen (suffix + suffind);
+  ret = (char *)xmalloc (plen + slen + 1);
+  if (plen)
+    strcpy (ret, prefix);
+  strcpy (ret + plen, suffix + suffind);
+  return ret;
+}
+
+/* Do the work of tilde expansion on FILENAME.  FILENAME starts with a
+   tilde.  If there is no expansion, call tilde_expansion_failure_hook.
+   This always returns a newly-allocated string, never static storage. */
+char *
+tilde_expand_word (filename)
+     const char *filename;
+{
+  char *dirname, *expansion, *username;
+  int user_len;
+  struct passwd *user_entry;
+
+  if (filename == 0)
+    return ((char *)NULL);
+
+  if (*filename != '~')
+    return (savestring (filename));
+
+  /* A leading `~/' or a bare `~' is *always* translated to the value of
+     $HOME or the home directory of the current user, regardless of any
+     preexpansion hook. */
+  if (filename[1] == '\0' || filename[1] == '/')
+    {
+      /* Prefix $HOME to the rest of the string. */
+      expansion = sh_get_env_value ("HOME");
+
+      /* If there is no HOME variable, look up the directory in
+	 the password database. */
+      if (expansion == 0)
+	expansion = sh_get_home_dir ();
+
+      return (glue_prefix_and_suffix (expansion, filename, 1));
+    }
+
+  username = isolate_tilde_prefix (filename, &user_len);
+
+  if (tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook)
+    {
+      expansion = (*tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook) (username);
+      if (expansion)
+	{
+	  dirname = glue_prefix_and_suffix (expansion, filename, user_len);
+	  free (username);
+	  free (expansion);
+	  return (dirname);
+	}
+    }
+
+  /* No preexpansion hook, or the preexpansion hook failed.  Look in the
+     password database. */
+  dirname = (char *)NULL;
+#if defined (HAVE_GETPWNAM)
+  user_entry = getpwnam (username);
+#else
+  user_entry = 0;
+#endif
+  if (user_entry == 0)
+    {
+      /* If the calling program has a special syntax for expanding tildes,
+	 and we couldn't find a standard expansion, then let them try. */
+      if (tilde_expansion_failure_hook)
+	{
+	  expansion = (*tilde_expansion_failure_hook) (username);
+	  if (expansion)
+	    {
+	      dirname = glue_prefix_and_suffix (expansion, filename, user_len);
+	      free (expansion);
+	    }
+	}
+      free (username);
+      /* If we don't have a failure hook, or if the failure hook did not
+	 expand the tilde, return a copy of what we were passed. */
+      if (dirname == 0)
+	dirname = savestring (filename);
+    }
+  else
+    {
+      free (username);
+      dirname = glue_prefix_and_suffix (user_entry->pw_dir, filename, user_len);
+    }
+#if defined (HAVE_GETPWENT)
+  endpwent ();
+#endif
+  return (dirname);
+}
+
+
+#if defined (TEST)
+#undef NULL
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+main (argc, argv)
+     int argc;
+     char **argv;
+{
+  char *result, line[512];
+  int done = 0;
+
+  while (!done)
+    {
+      printf ("~expand: ");
+      fflush (stdout);
+
+      if (!gets (line))
+	strcpy (line, "done");
+
+      if ((strcmp (line, "done") == 0) ||
+	  (strcmp (line, "quit") == 0) ||
+	  (strcmp (line, "exit") == 0))
+	{
+	  done = 1;
+	  break;
+	}
+
+      result = tilde_expand (line);
+      printf ("  --> %s\n", result);
+      free (result);
+    }
+  exit (0);
+}
+
+static void memory_error_and_abort ();
+
+static void *
+xmalloc (bytes)
+     size_t bytes;
+{
+  void *temp = (char *)malloc (bytes);
+
+  if (!temp)
+    memory_error_and_abort ();
+  return (temp);
+}
+
+static void *
+xrealloc (pointer, bytes)
+     void *pointer;
+     int bytes;
+{
+  void *temp;
+
+  if (!pointer)
+    temp = malloc (bytes);
+  else
+    temp = realloc (pointer, bytes);
+
+  if (!temp)
+    memory_error_and_abort ();
+
+  return (temp);
+}
+
+static void
+memory_error_and_abort ()
+{
+  fprintf (stderr, "readline: out of virtual memory\n");
+  abort ();
+}
+
+/*
+ * Local variables:
+ * compile-command: "gcc -g -DTEST -o tilde tilde.c"
+ * end:
+ */
+#endif /* TEST */
diff --git a/lib/readline/tilde.h b/lib/readline/tilde.h
index 6fea2aea..c58ce20e 120000..100644
--- a/lib/readline/tilde.h
+++ b/lib/readline/tilde.h
@@ -1 +1,81 @@
-../tilde/tilde.h
\ No newline at end of file
+/* tilde.h: Externally available variables and function in libtilde.a. */
+
+/* Copyright (C) 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+   This file contains the Readline Library (the Library), a set of
+   routines for providing Emacs style line input to programs that ask
+   for it.
+
+   The Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+   any later version.
+
+   The Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+   WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+   General Public License for more details.
+
+   The GNU General Public License is often shipped with GNU software, and
+   is generally kept in a file called COPYING or LICENSE.  If you do not
+   have a copy of the license, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+   59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
+
+#if !defined (_TILDE_H_)
+#  define _TILDE_H_
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+/* A function can be defined using prototypes and compile on both ANSI C
+   and traditional C compilers with something like this:
+	extern char *func PARAMS((char *, char *, int)); */
+
+#if !defined (PARAMS)
+#  if defined (__STDC__) || defined (__GNUC__) || defined (__cplusplus)
+#    define PARAMS(protos) protos
+#  else
+#    define PARAMS(protos) ()
+#  endif
+#endif
+
+typedef char *tilde_hook_func_t PARAMS((char *));
+
+/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function that the application
+   wants called before trying the standard tilde expansions.  The function
+   is called with the text sans tilde, and returns a malloc()'ed string
+   which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if the expansion fails. */
+extern tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook;
+
+/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function to call if the
+   standard meaning for expanding a tilde fails.  The function is called
+   with the text (sans tilde, as in "foo"), and returns a malloc()'ed string
+   which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if there is no expansion. */
+extern tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_failure_hook;
+
+/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which
+   are duplicates for a tilde prefix.  Bash uses this to expand
+   `=~' and `:~'. */
+extern char **tilde_additional_prefixes;
+
+/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which match
+   the end of a username, instead of just "/".  Bash sets this to
+   `:' and `=~'. */
+extern char **tilde_additional_suffixes;
+
+/* Return a new string which is the result of tilde expanding STRING. */
+extern char *tilde_expand PARAMS((const char *));
+
+/* Do the work of tilde expansion on FILENAME.  FILENAME starts with a
+   tilde.  If there is no expansion, call tilde_expansion_failure_hook. */
+extern char *tilde_expand_word PARAMS((const char *));
+
+/* Find the portion of the string beginning with ~ that should be expanded. */
+extern char *tilde_find_word PARAMS((const char *, int, int *));
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif /* _TILDE_H_ */
diff --git a/lib/readline/vi_mode.c b/lib/readline/vi_mode.c
index 2fcc1dc9..ac5fd744 100644
--- a/lib/readline/vi_mode.c
+++ b/lib/readline/vi_mode.c
@@ -1416,6 +1416,10 @@ _rl_vi_change_char (count, c, mb)
 #endif
 	_rl_insert_char (1, c);
     }
+
+  /* The cursor shall be left on the last character changed. */
+  rl_backward_char (1, c);
+
   rl_end_undo_group ();
 
   return (0);
diff --git a/parser-built b/parser-built
index 35272273..e69de29b 100644
--- a/parser-built
+++ b/parser-built
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-typedef union {
-  WORD_DESC *word;		/* the word that we read. */
-  int number;			/* the number that we read. */
-  WORD_LIST *word_list;
-  COMMAND *command;
-  REDIRECT *redirect;
-  ELEMENT element;
-  PATTERN_LIST *pattern;
-} YYSTYPE;
-#define	IF	257
-#define	THEN	258
-#define	ELSE	259
-#define	ELIF	260
-#define	FI	261
-#define	CASE	262
-#define	ESAC	263
-#define	FOR	264
-#define	SELECT	265
-#define	WHILE	266
-#define	UNTIL	267
-#define	DO	268
-#define	DONE	269
-#define	FUNCTION	270
-#define	COND_START	271
-#define	COND_END	272
-#define	COND_ERROR	273
-#define	IN	274
-#define	BANG	275
-#define	TIME	276
-#define	TIMEOPT	277
-#define	WORD	278
-#define	ASSIGNMENT_WORD	279
-#define	NUMBER	280
-#define	ARITH_CMD	281
-#define	ARITH_FOR_EXPRS	282
-#define	COND_CMD	283
-#define	AND_AND	284
-#define	OR_OR	285
-#define	GREATER_GREATER	286
-#define	LESS_LESS	287
-#define	LESS_AND	288
-#define	LESS_LESS_LESS	289
-#define	GREATER_AND	290
-#define	SEMI_SEMI	291
-#define	LESS_LESS_MINUS	292
-#define	AND_GREATER	293
-#define	LESS_GREATER	294
-#define	GREATER_BAR	295
-#define	yacc_EOF	296
-
-
-extern YYSTYPE yylval;
diff --git a/support/mkconffiles b/support/mkconffiles
index ec52614d..ec52614d 100644..100755
--- a/support/mkconffiles
+++ b/support/mkconffiles
diff --git a/support/mkversion.sh b/support/mkversion.sh
index 6aca944f..6aca944f 100644..100755
--- a/support/mkversion.sh
+++ b/support/mkversion.sh
diff --git a/support/rlvers.sh b/support/rlvers.sh
index b3de8feb..b3de8feb 100644..100755
--- a/support/rlvers.sh
+++ b/support/rlvers.sh
diff --git a/y.tab.c b/y.tab.c
index bff19c4e..c5badd9b 100644
--- a/y.tab.c
+++ b/y.tab.c
@@ -78,6 +78,7 @@
 #include "parser.h"
 #include "mailcheck.h"
 #include "test.h"
+#include "builtins.h"
 #include "builtins/common.h"
 #include "builtins/builtext.h"
 
@@ -323,7 +324,7 @@ static WORD_DESC *word_desc_to_read;
 
 static REDIRECTEE redir;
 
-#line 299 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 300 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 typedef union {
   WORD_DESC *word;		/* the word that we read. */
   int number;			/* the number that we read. */
@@ -465,20 +466,20 @@ static const short yyrhs[] = {    85,
 
 #if YYDEBUG != 0
 static const short yyrline[] = { 0,
-   350,   359,   366,   381,   391,   393,   397,   402,   407,   412,
-   417,   422,   427,   433,   439,   444,   449,   454,   459,   464,
-   469,   474,   479,   484,   489,   496,   503,   508,   513,   518,
-   523,   528,   533,   538,   543,   550,   552,   554,   558,   562,
-   573,   575,   579,   581,   583,   599,   603,   605,   607,   609,
-   611,   613,   615,   617,   619,   621,   623,   627,   632,   637,
-   642,   647,   652,   657,   662,   669,   674,   679,   684,   691,
-   696,   701,   706,   711,   716,   723,   728,   733,   740,   743,
-   746,   751,   753,   784,   791,   793,   795,   800,   804,   808,
-   812,   814,   816,   820,   821,   825,   827,   829,   831,   835,
-   836,   840,   842,   851,   859,   860,   866,   867,   874,   878,
-   880,   882,   889,   891,   893,   897,   898,   901,   903,   905,
-   909,   910,   919,   925,   934,   942,   944,   946,   953,   956,
-   960,   962,   967,   972,   977,   982,  1002,  1005,  1009,  1011
+   351,   360,   367,   382,   392,   394,   398,   403,   408,   413,
+   418,   423,   428,   434,   440,   445,   450,   455,   460,   465,
+   470,   475,   480,   485,   490,   497,   504,   509,   514,   519,
+   524,   529,   534,   539,   544,   551,   553,   555,   559,   563,
+   574,   576,   580,   582,   584,   600,   604,   606,   608,   610,
+   612,   614,   616,   618,   620,   622,   624,   628,   633,   638,
+   643,   648,   653,   658,   663,   670,   675,   680,   685,   692,
+   697,   702,   707,   712,   717,   724,   729,   734,   741,   744,
+   747,   752,   754,   785,   792,   794,   796,   801,   805,   809,
+   813,   815,   817,   821,   822,   826,   828,   830,   832,   836,
+   837,   841,   843,   852,   860,   861,   867,   868,   875,   879,
+   881,   883,   890,   892,   894,   898,   899,   902,   904,   906,
+   910,   911,   920,   926,   935,   943,   945,   947,   954,   957,
+   961,   963,   969,   975,   981,   987,  1007,  1010,  1014,  1016
 };
 #endif
 
@@ -1292,7 +1293,7 @@ yyreduce:
   switch (yyn) {
 
 case 1:
-#line 351 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 352 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  /* Case of regular command.  Discard the error
 			     safety net,and return the command just parsed. */
@@ -1303,7 +1304,7 @@ case 1:
 			;
     break;}
 case 2:
-#line 360 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 361 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  /* Case of regular command, but not a very
 			     interesting one.  Return a NULL command. */
@@ -1312,7 +1313,7 @@ case 2:
 			;
     break;}
 case 3:
-#line 367 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 368 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  /* Error during parsing.  Return NULL command. */
 			  global_command = (COMMAND *)NULL;
@@ -1329,7 +1330,7 @@ case 3:
 			;
     break;}
 case 4:
-#line 382 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 383 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  /* Case of EOF seen by itself.  Do ignoreeof or
 			     not. */
@@ -1339,57 +1340,57 @@ case 4:
 			;
     break;}
 case 5:
-#line 392 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 393 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL); ;
     break;}
 case 6:
-#line 394 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 395 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, yyvsp[-1].word_list); ;
     break;}
 case 7:
-#line 398 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 399 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_output_direction, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 8:
-#line 403 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 404 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_input_direction, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 9:
-#line 408 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 409 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_output_direction, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 10:
-#line 413 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 414 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_input_direction, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 11:
-#line 418 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 419 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_appending_to, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 12:
-#line 423 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 424 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_appending_to, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 13:
-#line 428 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 429 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_reading_until, redir);
@@ -1397,7 +1398,7 @@ case 13:
 			;
     break;}
 case 14:
-#line 434 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 435 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_reading_until, redir);
@@ -1405,77 +1406,77 @@ case 14:
 			;
     break;}
 case 15:
-#line 440 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 441 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_reading_string, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 16:
-#line 445 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 446 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_reading_string, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 17:
-#line 450 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 451 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_duplicating_input, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 18:
-#line 455 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 456 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_input, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 19:
-#line 460 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 461 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_duplicating_output, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 20:
-#line 465 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 466 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_output, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 21:
-#line 470 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 471 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_duplicating_input_word, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 22:
-#line 475 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 476 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_input_word, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 23:
-#line 480 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 481 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_duplicating_output_word, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 24:
-#line 485 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 486 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_output_word, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 25:
-#line 490 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 491 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection
@@ -1484,7 +1485,7 @@ case 25:
 			;
     break;}
 case 26:
-#line 497 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 498 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection
@@ -1493,88 +1494,88 @@ case 26:
 			;
     break;}
 case 27:
-#line 504 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 505 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = 0;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_close_this, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 28:
-#line 509 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 510 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = 0;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_close_this, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 29:
-#line 514 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 515 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = 0;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_close_this, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 30:
-#line 519 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 520 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.dest = 0;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_close_this, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 31:
-#line 524 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 525 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_err_and_out, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 32:
-#line 529 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 530 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_input_output, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 33:
-#line 534 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 535 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_input_output, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 34:
-#line 539 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 540 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_output_force, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 35:
-#line 544 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 545 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
 			  yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_output_force, redir);
 			;
     break;}
 case 36:
-#line 551 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 552 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.element.word = yyvsp[0].word; yyval.element.redirect = 0; ;
     break;}
 case 37:
-#line 553 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 554 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.element.word = yyvsp[0].word; yyval.element.redirect = 0; ;
     break;}
 case 38:
-#line 555 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 556 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.element.redirect = yyvsp[0].redirect; yyval.element.word = 0; ;
     break;}
 case 39:
-#line 559 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 560 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.redirect = yyvsp[0].redirect;
 			;
     break;}
 case 40:
-#line 563 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 564 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  register REDIRECT *t;
 
@@ -1585,23 +1586,23 @@ case 40:
 			;
     break;}
 case 41:
-#line 574 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 575 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_simple_command (yyvsp[0].element, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
     break;}
 case 42:
-#line 576 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 577 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_simple_command (yyvsp[0].element, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
     break;}
 case 43:
-#line 580 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 581 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = clean_simple_command (yyvsp[0].command); ;
     break;}
 case 44:
-#line 582 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 583 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 45:
-#line 584 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 585 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  COMMAND *tc;
 
@@ -1619,218 +1620,218 @@ case 45:
 			;
     break;}
 case 46:
-#line 600 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 601 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 47:
-#line 604 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 605 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 48:
-#line 606 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 607 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 49:
-#line 608 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 609 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_while_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
     break;}
 case 50:
-#line 610 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 611 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_until_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
     break;}
 case 51:
-#line 612 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 613 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 52:
-#line 614 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 615 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 53:
-#line 616 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 617 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 54:
-#line 618 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 619 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 55:
-#line 620 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 621 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 56:
-#line 622 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 623 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 57:
-#line 624 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 625 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 58:
-#line 628 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 629 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 59:
-#line 633 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 634 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 60:
-#line 638 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 639 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 61:
-#line 643 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 644 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 62:
-#line 648 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 649 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 63:
-#line 653 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 654 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 64:
-#line 658 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 659 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-7].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL, yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 65:
-#line 663 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 664 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-7].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL, yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 66:
-#line 670 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 671 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 				  yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
 				  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 				;
     break;}
 case 67:
-#line 675 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 676 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 				  yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
 				  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 				;
     break;}
 case 68:
-#line 680 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 681 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 				  yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-3].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
 				  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 				;
     break;}
 case 69:
-#line 685 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 686 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 				  yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-3].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
 				  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 				;
     break;}
 case 70:
-#line 692 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 693 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 71:
-#line 697 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 698 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 72:
-#line 702 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 703 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 73:
-#line 707 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 708 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 74:
-#line 712 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 713 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 75:
-#line 717 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 718 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 76:
-#line 724 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 725 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_case_command (yyvsp[-4].word, (PATTERN_LIST *)NULL, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 77:
-#line 729 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 730 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_case_command (yyvsp[-5].word, yyvsp[-2].pattern, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 78:
-#line 734 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 735 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_case_command (yyvsp[-4].word, yyvsp[-1].pattern, word_lineno[word_top]);
 			  if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
 			;
     break;}
 case 79:
-#line 741 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 742 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_function_def (yyvsp[-4].word, yyvsp[0].command, function_dstart, function_bstart); ;
     break;}
 case 80:
-#line 744 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 745 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_function_def (yyvsp[-4].word, yyvsp[0].command, function_dstart, function_bstart); ;
     break;}
 case 81:
-#line 747 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 748 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_function_def (yyvsp[-2].word, yyvsp[0].command, function_dstart, function_bstart); ;
     break;}
 case 82:
-#line 752 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 753 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 83:
-#line 754 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 755 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  COMMAND *tc;
 
@@ -1861,82 +1862,82 @@ case 83:
 			;
     break;}
 case 84:
-#line 785 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 786 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = make_subshell_command (yyvsp[-1].command);
 			  yyval.command->flags |= CMD_WANT_SUBSHELL;
 			;
     break;}
 case 85:
-#line 792 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 793 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
     break;}
 case 86:
-#line 794 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 795 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-5].command, yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
     break;}
 case 87:
-#line 796 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 797 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-4].command, yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
     break;}
 case 88:
-#line 801 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 802 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_group_command (yyvsp[-1].command); ;
     break;}
 case 89:
-#line 805 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 806 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_arith_command (yyvsp[0].word_list); ;
     break;}
 case 90:
-#line 809 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 810 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[-1].command; ;
     break;}
 case 91:
-#line 813 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 814 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
     break;}
 case 92:
-#line 815 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 816 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-4].command, yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command); ;
     break;}
 case 93:
-#line 817 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 818 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command, yyvsp[0].command); ;
     break;}
 case 95:
-#line 822 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 823 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyvsp[0].pattern->next = yyvsp[-1].pattern; yyval.pattern = yyvsp[0].pattern; ;
     break;}
 case 96:
-#line 826 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 827 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, yyvsp[0].command); ;
     break;}
 case 97:
-#line 828 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 829 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
     break;}
 case 98:
-#line 830 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 831 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, yyvsp[0].command); ;
     break;}
 case 99:
-#line 832 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 833 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
     break;}
 case 101:
-#line 837 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 838 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyvsp[-1].pattern->next = yyvsp[-2].pattern; yyval.pattern = yyvsp[-1].pattern; ;
     break;}
 case 102:
-#line 841 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 842 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL); ;
     break;}
 case 103:
-#line 843 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 844 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, yyvsp[-2].word_list); ;
     break;}
 case 104:
-#line 852 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 853 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
 			  if (need_here_doc)
@@ -1944,13 +1945,13 @@ case 104:
 			 ;
     break;}
 case 106:
-#line 861 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 862 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
 			;
     break;}
 case 108:
-#line 868 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 869 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  if (yyvsp[-2].command->type == cm_connection)
 			    yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-2].command, (COMMAND *)NULL, '&');
@@ -1959,15 +1960,15 @@ case 108:
 			;
     break;}
 case 110:
-#line 879 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 880 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, AND_AND); ;
     break;}
 case 111:
-#line 881 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 882 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, OR_OR); ;
     break;}
 case 112:
-#line 883 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 884 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  if (yyvsp[-3].command->type == cm_connection)
 			    yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, '&');
@@ -1976,31 +1977,31 @@ case 112:
 			;
     break;}
 case 113:
-#line 890 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 891 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, ';'); ;
     break;}
 case 114:
-#line 892 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 893 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, ';'); ;
     break;}
 case 115:
-#line 894 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 895 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 118:
-#line 902 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 903 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.number = '\n'; ;
     break;}
 case 119:
-#line 904 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 905 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.number = ';'; ;
     break;}
 case 120:
-#line 906 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 907 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.number = yacc_EOF; ;
     break;}
 case 123:
-#line 920 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 921 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
 			  if (need_here_doc)
@@ -2008,7 +2009,7 @@ case 123:
 			;
     break;}
 case 124:
-#line 926 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 927 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  if (yyvsp[-1].command->type == cm_connection)
 			    yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-1].command, (COMMAND *)NULL, '&');
@@ -2019,7 +2020,7 @@ case 124:
 			;
     break;}
 case 125:
-#line 935 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 936 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[-1].command;
 			  if (need_here_doc)
@@ -2027,15 +2028,15 @@ case 125:
 			;
     break;}
 case 126:
-#line 943 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 944 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, AND_AND); ;
     break;}
 case 127:
-#line 945 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 946 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, OR_OR); ;
     break;}
 case 128:
-#line 947 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 948 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  if (yyvsp[-2].command->type == cm_connection)
 			    yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command, '&');
@@ -2044,47 +2045,51 @@ case 128:
 			;
     break;}
 case 129:
-#line 954 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 955 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command, ';'); ;
     break;}
 case 130:
-#line 957 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 958 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 131:
-#line 961 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 962 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 132:
-#line 963 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 964 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
-			  yyvsp[0].command->flags |= CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
+			  if (yyvsp[0].command)
+			    yyvsp[0].command->flags |= CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
 			;
     break;}
 case 133:
-#line 968 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 970 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
-			  yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number;
+			  if (yyvsp[0].command)
+			    yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number;
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
 			;
     break;}
 case 134:
-#line 973 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 976 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
-			  yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-2].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
+			  if (yyvsp[0].command)
+			    yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-2].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
 			;
     break;}
 case 135:
-#line 978 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 982 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
-			  yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
+			  if (yyvsp[0].command)
+			    yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
 			  yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
 			;
     break;}
 case 136:
-#line 983 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 988 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 {
 			  ELEMENT x;
 
@@ -2103,19 +2108,19 @@ case 136:
 			;
     break;}
 case 137:
-#line 1004 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1009 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, '|'); ;
     break;}
 case 138:
-#line 1006 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1011 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
     break;}
 case 139:
-#line 1010 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1015 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.number = CMD_TIME_PIPELINE; ;
     break;}
 case 140:
-#line 1012 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1017 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 { yyval.number = CMD_TIME_PIPELINE|CMD_TIME_POSIX; ;
     break;}
 }
@@ -2340,7 +2345,7 @@ yyerrhandle:
     }
   return 1;
 }
-#line 1014 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1019 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
 
 
 /* Possible states for the parser that require it to do special things. */
@@ -2358,6 +2363,7 @@ yyerrhandle:
 #define PST_ALEXPAND	0x0800		/* OK to expand aliases - unused */
 #define PST_CMDTOKEN	0x1000		/* command token OK - unused */
 #define PST_COMPASSIGN	0x2000		/* parsing x=(...) compound assignment */
+#define PST_ASSIGNOK	0x4000		/* assignment statement ok in this context */
 
 /* Initial size to allocate for tokens, and the
    amount to grow them by. */
@@ -2669,8 +2675,13 @@ yy_stream_get ()
 
   result = EOF;
   if (bash_input.location.file)
-    result = getc_with_restart (bash_input.location.file);
-
+    {
+      if (interactive)
+	interrupt_immediately++;
+      result = getc_with_restart (bash_input.location.file);
+      if (interactive)
+	interrupt_immediately--;
+    }
   return (result);
 }
 
@@ -2983,11 +2994,11 @@ read_a_line (remove_quoted_newline)
   pass_next = 0;
   while (1)
     {
-      c = yy_getc ();
-
       /* Allow immediate exit if interrupted during input. */
       QUIT;
 
+      c = yy_getc ();
+
       /* Ignore null bytes in input. */
       if (c == 0)
 	{
@@ -3192,6 +3203,12 @@ shell_getc (remove_quoted_newline)
 
   QUIT;
 
+  if (sigwinch_received)
+    {
+      sigwinch_received = 0;
+      get_new_window_size (0);
+    }
+      
   if (eol_ungetc_lookahead)
     {
       c = eol_ungetc_lookahead;
@@ -3385,14 +3402,6 @@ shell_getc (remove_quoted_newline)
   if (uc)
     shell_input_line_index++;
 
-  if MBTEST(uc == '\\' && remove_quoted_newline && shell_input_line[shell_input_line_index] == '\n')
-    {
-	if (SHOULD_PROMPT ())
-	  prompt_again ();
-	line_number++;
-	goto restart_read;
-    }
-
 #if defined (ALIAS) || defined (DPAREN_ARITHMETIC)
   /* If UC is NULL, we have reached the end of the current input string.  If
      pushed_string_list is non-empty, it's time to pop to the previous string
@@ -3408,6 +3417,14 @@ shell_getc (remove_quoted_newline)
     }
 #endif /* ALIAS || DPAREN_ARITHMETIC */
 
+  if MBTEST(uc == '\\' && remove_quoted_newline && shell_input_line[shell_input_line_index] == '\n')
+    {
+	if (SHOULD_PROMPT ())
+	  prompt_again ();
+	line_number++;
+	goto restart_read;
+    }
+
   if (!uc && shell_input_line_terminator == EOF)
     return ((shell_input_line_index != 0) ? '\n' : EOF);
 
@@ -3469,7 +3486,7 @@ execute_prompt_command (command)
   parse_and_execute (savestring (command), "PROMPT_COMMAND", SEVAL_NONINT|SEVAL_NOHIST);
 
   restore_parser_state (&ps);
-  bind_variable ("_", last_lastarg);
+  bind_variable ("_", last_lastarg, 0);
   FREE (last_lastarg);
 
   if (token_to_read == '\n')	/* reset_parser was called */
@@ -3897,6 +3914,8 @@ read_token (command)
       parser_state &= ~PST_ALEXPNEXT;
 #endif /* ALIAS */
 
+      parser_state &= ~PST_ASSIGNOK;
+
       return (character);
     }
 
@@ -3910,6 +3929,8 @@ read_token (command)
 	parser_state &= ~PST_ALEXPNEXT;
 #endif /* ALIAS */
 
+      parser_state &= ~PST_ASSIGNOK;
+
       peek_char = shell_getc (1);
       if (character == peek_char)
 	{
@@ -3937,6 +3958,7 @@ read_token (command)
 #if defined (ALIAS)
 	      parser_state &= ~PST_ALEXPNEXT;
 #endif /* ALIAS */
+
 	      return (SEMI_SEMI);
 
 	    case '&':
@@ -4017,13 +4039,13 @@ read_token (command)
 /*
  * Match a $(...) or other grouping construct.  This has to handle embedded
  * quoted strings ('', ``, "") and nested constructs.  It also must handle
- * reprompting the user, if necessary, after reading a newline (unless the
- * P_NONL flag is passed), and returning correct error values if it reads
- * EOF.
+ * reprompting the user, if necessary, after reading a newline, and returning
+ * correct error values if it reads EOF.
  */
 #define P_FIRSTCLOSE	0x01
 #define P_ALLOWESC	0x02
 #define P_DQUOTE	0x04
+#define P_COMMAND	0x08	/* parsing a command, so look for comments */
 
 static char matched_pair_error;
 static char *
@@ -4032,13 +4054,14 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
      int open, close;
      int *lenp, flags;
 {
-  int count, ch, was_dollar;
+  int count, ch, was_dollar, in_comment, check_comment;
   int pass_next_character, nestlen, ttranslen, start_lineno;
   char *ret, *nestret, *ttrans;
   int retind, retsize, rflags;
 
   count = 1;
-  pass_next_character = was_dollar = 0;
+  pass_next_character = was_dollar = in_comment = 0;
+  check_comment = (flags & P_COMMAND) && qc != '\'' && qc != '"' && (flags & P_DQUOTE) == 0;
 
   /* RFLAGS is the set of flags we want to pass to recursive calls. */
   rflags = (qc == '"') ? P_DQUOTE : (flags & P_DQUOTE);
@@ -4049,7 +4072,11 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
   start_lineno = line_number;
   while (count)
     {
+#if 0
       ch = shell_getc ((qc != '\'' || (flags & P_ALLOWESC)) && pass_next_character == 0);
+#else
+      ch = shell_getc (qc != '\'' && pass_next_character == 0);
+#endif
       if (ch == EOF)
 	{
 	  free (ret);
@@ -4062,6 +4089,21 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
       if (ch == '\n' && SHOULD_PROMPT ())
 	prompt_again ();
 
+      if (in_comment)
+	{
+	  /* Add this character. */
+	  RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (ret, retind, 1, retsize, 64);
+	  ret[retind++] = ch;
+
+	  if (ch == '\n')
+	    in_comment = 0;
+
+	  continue;
+	}
+      /* Not exactly right yet */
+      else if (check_comment && in_comment == 0 && ch == '#' && (retind == 0 || ret[retind-1] == '\n' || whitespace (ret[retind -1])))
+	in_comment = 1;
+
       if (pass_next_character)		/* last char was backslash */
 	{
 	  pass_next_character = 0;
@@ -4129,9 +4171,18 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
 		  /* Translate $'...' here. */
 		  ttrans = ansiexpand (nestret, 0, nestlen - 1, &ttranslen);
 		  xfree (nestret);
-		  nestret = sh_single_quote (ttrans);
-		  free (ttrans);
-		  nestlen = strlen (nestret);
+
+		  if ((rflags & P_DQUOTE) == 0)
+		    {
+		      nestret = sh_single_quote (ttrans);
+		      free (ttrans);
+		      nestlen = strlen (nestret);
+		    }
+		  else
+		    {
+		      nestret = ttrans;
+		      nestlen = ttranslen;
+		    }
 		  retind -= 2;		/* back up before the $' */
 		}
 	      else if MBTEST(was_dollar && ch == '"' && (extended_quote || (rflags & P_DQUOTE) == 0))
@@ -4139,13 +4190,10 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
 		  /* Locale expand $"..." here. */
 		  ttrans = localeexpand (nestret, 0, nestlen - 1, start_lineno, &ttranslen);
 		  xfree (nestret);
-		  nestret = (char *)xmalloc (ttranslen + 3);
-		  nestret[0] = '"';
-		  strcpy (nestret + 1, ttrans);
-		  nestret[ttranslen + 1] = '"';
-		  nestret[ttranslen += 2] = '\0';
+
+		  nestret = sh_mkdoublequoted (ttrans, ttranslen, 0);
 		  free (ttrans);
-		  nestlen = ttranslen;
+		  nestlen = ttranslen + 2;
 		  retind -= 2;		/* back up before the $" */
 		}
 
@@ -4164,6 +4212,7 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
       else if MBTEST(open == '"' && ch == '`')
 	{
 	  nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, '`', '`', &nestlen, rflags);
+add_nestret:
 	  if (nestret == &matched_pair_error)
 	    {
 	      free (ret);
@@ -4177,6 +4226,11 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
 	    }
 	  FREE (nestret);
 	}
+      else if MBTEST(qc == '`' && (ch == '"' || ch == '\'') && in_comment == 0)
+	{
+	  nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, ch, ch, &nestlen, rflags);
+	  goto add_nestret;
+	}
       else if MBTEST(was_dollar && (ch == '(' || ch == '{' || ch == '['))	/* ) } ] */
 	/* check for $(), $[], or ${} inside quoted string. */
 	{
@@ -4188,18 +4242,8 @@ parse_matched_pair (qc, open, close, lenp, flags)
 	    nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, '{', '}', &nestlen, P_FIRSTCLOSE|rflags);
 	  else if (ch == '[')		/* ] */
 	    nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, '[', ']', &nestlen, rflags);
-	  if (nestret == &matched_pair_error)
-	    {
-	      free (ret);
-	      return &matched_pair_error;
-	    }
-	  if (nestlen)
-	    {
-	      RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (ret, retind, nestlen, retsize, 64);
-	      strcpy (ret + retind, nestret);
-	      retind += nestlen;
-	    }
-	  FREE (nestret);
+
+	  goto add_nestret;
 	}
       was_dollar = MBTEST(ch == '$');
     }
@@ -4230,9 +4274,10 @@ parse_dparen (c)
       cmdtyp = parse_arith_cmd (&wval, 0);
       if (cmdtyp == 1)
 	{
+	  wd = alloc_word_desc ();
+	  wd->word = wval;
 	  wd = make_word (wval);
 	  yylval.word_list = make_word_list (wd, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
-	  free (wval);
 	  return (ARITH_FOR_EXPRS);
 	}
       else
@@ -4244,21 +4289,14 @@ parse_dparen (c)
   if (reserved_word_acceptable (last_read_token))
     {
       sline = line_number;
-#if 0
-      cmdtyp = parse_arith_cmd (&wval, 1);
-#else
+
       cmdtyp = parse_arith_cmd (&wval, 0);
-#endif
       if (cmdtyp == 1)	/* arithmetic command */
 	{
-	  wd = make_word (wval);
-#if 0
-	  wd->flags = W_QUOTED;
-#else
-	  wd->flags = W_QUOTED|W_NOSPLIT|W_NOGLOB;
-#endif
+	  wd = alloc_word_desc ();
+	  wd->word = wval;
+	  wd->flags = W_QUOTED|W_NOSPLIT|W_NOGLOB|W_DQUOTE;
 	  yylval.word_list = make_word_list (wd, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
-	  free (wval);	/* make_word copies it */
 	  return (ARITH_CMD);
 	}
       else if (cmdtyp == 0)	/* nested subshell */
@@ -4576,6 +4614,7 @@ token_is_assignment (t, i)
   return r;
 }
 
+/* XXX - possible changes here for `+=' */
 static int
 token_is_ident (t, i)
      char *t;
@@ -4608,6 +4647,10 @@ read_token_word (character)
   /* DOLLAR_PRESENT becomes non-zero if we see a `$'. */
   int dollar_present;
 
+  /* COMPOUND_ASSIGNMENT becomes non-zero if we are parsing a compound
+     assignment. */
+  int compound_assignment;
+
   /* QUOTED becomes non-zero if we see one of ("), ('), (`), or (\). */
   int quoted;
 
@@ -4627,7 +4670,7 @@ read_token_word (character)
 
   token_index = 0;
   all_digit_token = DIGIT (character);
-  dollar_present = quoted = pass_next_character = 0;
+  dollar_present = quoted = pass_next_character = compound_assignment = 0;
 
   for (;;)
     {
@@ -4673,7 +4716,7 @@ read_token_word (character)
       if MBTEST(shellquote (character))
 	{
 	  push_delimiter (dstack, character);
-	  ttok = parse_matched_pair (character, character, character, &ttoklen, 0);
+	  ttok = parse_matched_pair (character, character, character, &ttoklen, (character == '`') ? P_COMMAND : 0);
 	  pop_delimiter (dstack);
 	  if (ttok == &matched_pair_error)
 	    return -1;		/* Bail immediately. */
@@ -4736,7 +4779,7 @@ read_token_word (character)
 		     history literally rather than causing a possibly-
 		     incorrect `;' to be added. ) */
 		  push_delimiter (dstack, peek_char);
-		  ttok = parse_matched_pair (cd, '(', ')', &ttoklen, 0);
+		  ttok = parse_matched_pair (cd, '(', ')', &ttoklen, P_COMMAND);
 		  pop_delimiter (dstack);
 		}
 	      else
@@ -4772,27 +4815,25 @@ read_token_word (character)
 		{
 		  ttrans = ansiexpand (ttok, 0, ttoklen - 1, &ttranslen);
 		  free (ttok);
+
 		  /* Insert the single quotes and correctly quote any
 		     embedded single quotes (allowed because P_ALLOWESC was
 		     passed to parse_matched_pair). */
 		  ttok = sh_single_quote (ttrans);
 		  free (ttrans);
+		  ttranslen = strlen (ttok);
 		  ttrans = ttok;
-		  ttranslen = strlen (ttrans);
 		}
 	      else
 		{
-		  /* Try to locale-expand the converted string. */
+		  /* Try to locale)-expand the converted string. */
 		  ttrans = localeexpand (ttok, 0, ttoklen - 1, first_line, &ttranslen);
 		  free (ttok);
 
 		  /* Add the double quotes back */
-		  ttok = (char *)xmalloc (ttranslen + 3);
-		  ttok[0] = '"';
-		  strcpy (ttok + 1, ttrans);
-		  ttok[ttranslen + 1] = '"';
-		  ttok[ttranslen += 2] = '\0';
+		  ttok = sh_mkdoublequoted (ttrans, ttranslen, 0);
 		  free (ttrans);
+		  ttranslen += 2;
 		  ttrans = ttok;
 		}
 
@@ -4845,7 +4886,7 @@ read_token_word (character)
 	  goto next_character;
         }
       /* Identify possible compound array variable assignment. */
-      else if MBTEST(character == '=' && token_index > 0 && token_is_assignment (token, token_index))
+      else if MBTEST(character == '=' && token_index > 0 && (assignment_acceptable (last_read_token) || (parser_state & PST_ASSIGNOK)) && token_is_assignment (token, token_index))
 	{
 	  peek_char = shell_getc (1);
 	  if MBTEST(peek_char == '(')		/* ) */
@@ -4866,7 +4907,12 @@ read_token_word (character)
 	      token[token_index++] = ')';
 	      FREE (ttok);
 	      all_digit_token = 0;
+	      compound_assignment = 1;
+#if 0
 	      goto next_character;
+#else
+	      goto got_token;		/* ksh93 seems to do this */
+#endif
 	    }
 	  else
 	    shell_ungetc (peek_char);
@@ -4961,6 +5007,8 @@ got_token:
     the_word->flags |= W_HASDOLLAR;
   if (quoted)
     the_word->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+  if (compound_assignment)
+    the_word->flags |= W_COMPASSIGN;
   /* A word is an assignment if it appears at the beginning of a
      simple command, or after another assignment word.  This is
      context-dependent, so it cannot be handled in the grammar. */
@@ -4972,6 +5020,14 @@ got_token:
 	the_word->flags |= W_NOSPLIT;
     }
 
+  if (command_token_position (last_read_token))
+    {
+      struct builtin *b;
+      b = builtin_address_internal (token, 0);
+      if (b && (b->flags & ASSIGNMENT_BUILTIN))
+        parser_state |= PST_ASSIGNOK;
+    }
+
   yylval.word = the_word;
 
   result = ((the_word->flags & (W_ASSIGNMENT|W_NOSPLIT)) == (W_ASSIGNMENT|W_NOSPLIT))
@@ -5129,6 +5185,8 @@ history_delimiting_chars ()
 	return " ";
       return ";";
     }
+  else if (two_tokens_ago == CASE && token_before_that == WORD && (parser_state & PST_CASESTMT))
+    return " ";
 
   for (i = 0; no_semi_successors[i]; i++)
     {
@@ -5433,7 +5491,7 @@ decode_prompt_string (string)
 #define ROOT_PATH(x)	((x)[0] == '/' && (x)[1] == 0)
 #define DOUBLE_SLASH_ROOT(x)	((x)[0] == '/' && (x)[1] == '/' && (x)[2] == 0)
 		/* Abbreviate \W as ~ if $PWD == $HOME */
-		if (c == 'W' && (((t = get_string_value ("HOME")) == 0) || STREQ (t, temp) == 0))
+		if (c == 'W' && (((t = get_string_value ("HOME")) == 0) || STREQ (t, t_string) == 0))
 		  {
 		    if (ROOT_PATH (t_string) == 0 && DOUBLE_SLASH_ROOT (t_string) == 0)
 		      {
@@ -5912,7 +5970,7 @@ parse_string_to_word_list (s, flags, whom)
 	  line_number = orig_line_number + line_number - 1;
 	  orig_current_token = current_token;
 	  current_token = tok;
-	  yyerror ((char *)NULL);	/* does the right thing */
+	  yyerror (NULL);	/* does the right thing */
 	  current_token = orig_current_token;
 	  if (wl)
 	    dispose_words (wl);
@@ -5987,7 +6045,7 @@ parse_compound_assignment (retlenp)
 	  if (tok == yacc_EOF)	/* ( */
 	    parser_error (orig_line_number, _("unexpected EOF while looking for matching `)'"));
 	  else
-	    yyerror ((char *)NULL);	/* does the right thing */
+	    yyerror(NULL);	/* does the right thing */
 	  if (wl)
 	    dispose_words (wl);
 	  wl = &parse_string_error;
@@ -6042,7 +6100,7 @@ save_parser_state (ps)
 #endif
 
   if (ps == 0)
-    ps = xmalloc (sizeof (sh_parser_state_t));
+    ps = (sh_parser_state_t *)xmalloc (sizeof (sh_parser_state_t));
   if (ps == 0)
     return ((sh_parser_state_t *)NULL);